1SMB.CONF(5)              File Formats and Conventions              SMB.CONF(5)
2
3
4

NAME

6       smb.conf - The configuration file for the Samba suite
7

SYNOPSIS

9       The smb.conf file is a configuration file for the Samba suite.
10       smb.conf contains runtime configuration information for the Samba
11       programs. The complete description of the file format and possible
12       parameters held within are here for reference purposes.
13

FILE FORMAT

15       The file consists of sections and parameters. A section begins with the
16       name of the section in square brackets and continues until the next
17       section begins. Sections contain parameters of the form:
18
19           name = value
20
21       The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated line
22       represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter.
23
24       Section and parameter names are not case sensitive.
25
26       Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant. Whitespace
27       before or after the first equals sign is discarded. Leading, trailing
28       and internal whitespace in section and parameter names is irrelevant.
29       Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter value is discarded.
30       Internal whitespace within a parameter value is retained verbatim.
31
32       Any line beginning with a semicolon (“;”) or a hash (“#”) character is
33       ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace.
34
35       Any line ending in a “\” is continued on the next line in the customary
36       UNIX fashion.
37
38       The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a
39       string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no,
40       1/0 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is
41       preserved in string values. Some items such as create masks are
42       numeric.
43

SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

45       Each section in the configuration file (except for the [global]
46       section) describes a shared resource (known as a “share”). The section
47       name is the name of the shared resource and the parameters within the
48       section define the shares attributes.
49
50       There are three special sections, [global], [homes] and [printers],
51       which are described under special sections. The following notes apply
52       to ordinary section descriptions.
53
54       A share consists of a directory to which access is being given plus a
55       description of the access rights which are granted to the user of the
56       service. Some housekeeping options are also specifiable.
57
58       Sections are either file share services (used by the client as an
59       extension of their native file systems) or printable services (used by
60       the client to access print services on the host running the server).
61
62       Sections may be designated guest services, in which case no password is
63       required to access them. A specified UNIX guest account is used to
64       define access privileges in this case.
65
66       Sections other than guest services will require a password to access
67       them. The client provides the username. As older clients only provide
68       passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list of usernames to
69       check against the password using the user = option in the share
70       definition. For modern clients such as Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this
71       should not be necessary.
72
73       The access rights granted by the server are masked by the access rights
74       granted to the specified or guest UNIX user by the host system. The
75       server does not grant more access than the host system grants.
76
77       The following sample section defines a file space share. The user has
78       write access to the path /home/bar. The share is accessed via the share
79       name foo:
80
81                [foo]
82                path = /home/bar
83                read only = no
84
85       The following sample section defines a printable share. The share is
86       read-only, but printable. That is, the only write access permitted is
87       via calls to open, write to and close a spool file. The guest ok
88       parameter means access will be permitted as the default guest user
89       (specified elsewhere):
90
91                [aprinter]
92                path = /usr/spool/public
93                read only = yes
94                printable = yes
95                guest ok = yes
96
97

SPECIAL SECTIONS

99   The [global] section
100       Parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are
101       defaults for sections that do not specifically define certain items.
102       See the notes under PARAMETERS for more information.
103
104   The [homes] section
105       If a section called [homes] is included in the configuration file,
106       services connecting clients to their home directories can be created on
107       the fly by the server.
108
109       When the connection request is made, the existing sections are scanned.
110       If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, the requested
111       section name is treated as a username and looked up in the local
112       password file. If the name exists and the correct password has been
113       given, a share is created by cloning the [homes] section.
114
115       Some modifications are then made to the newly created share:
116
117       ·   The share name is changed from homes to the located username.
118
119       ·   If no path was given, the path is set to the user´s home directory.
120
121
122       If you decide to use a path = line in your [homes] section, it may be
123       useful to use the %S macro. For example:
124
125           path = /data/pchome/%S
126
127       is useful if you have different home directories for your PCs than for
128       UNIX access.
129
130       This is a fast and simple way to give a large number of clients access
131       to their home directories with a minimum of fuss.
132
133       A similar process occurs if the requested section name is “homes”,
134       except that the share name is not changed to that of the requesting
135       user. This method of using the [homes] section works well if different
136       users share a client PC.
137
138       The [homes] section can specify all the parameters a normal service
139       section can specify, though some make more sense than others. The
140       following is a typical and suitable [homes] section:
141
142           [homes]
143           read only = no
144
145       An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes]
146       section, all home directories will be visible to all clients without a
147       password. In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable,
148       it is wise to also specify read only access.
149
150       The browseable flag for auto home directories will be inherited from
151       the global browseable flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is
152       useful as it means setting browseable = no in the [homes] section will
153       hide the [homes] share but make any auto home directories visible.
154
155   The [printers] section
156       This section works like [homes], but for printers.
157
158       If a [printers] section occurs in the configuration file, users are
159       able to connect to any printer specified in the local host´s printcap
160       file.
161
162       When a connection request is made, the existing sections are scanned.
163       If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, but a [homes]
164       section exists, it is used as described above. Otherwise, the requested
165       section name is treated as a printer name and the appropriate printcap
166       file is scanned to see if the requested section name is a valid printer
167       share name. If a match is found, a new printer share is created by
168       cloning the [printers] section.
169
170       A few modifications are then made to the newly created share:
171
172       ·   The share name is set to the located printer name
173
174       ·   If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the
175           located printer name
176
177       ·   If the share does not permit guest access and no username was
178           given, the username is set to the located printer name.
179
180
181       The [printers] service MUST be printable - if you specify otherwise,
182       the server will refuse to load the configuration file.
183
184       Typically the path specified is that of a world-writeable spool
185       directory with the sticky bit set on it. A typical [printers] entry
186       looks like this:
187
188           [printers]
189           path = /usr/spool/public
190           guest ok = yes
191           printable = yes
192
193       All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate
194       printer names as far as the server is concerned. If your printing
195       subsystem doesn´t work like that, you will have to set up a
196       pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or more lines like
197       this:
198
199           alias|alias|alias|alias...
200
201       Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing
202       subsystem. In the [global] section, specify the new file as your
203       printcap. The server will only recognize names found in your
204       pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain whatever aliases you like.
205       The same technique could be used simply to limit access to a subset of
206       your local printers.
207
208       An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry of
209       a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines, components (if
210       there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols (|).
211
212           Note
213           On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are
214           defined on the system you may be able to use printcap name = lpstat
215           to automatically obtain a list of printers. See the printcap name
216           option for more details.
217

USERSHARES

219       Starting with Samba version 3.0.23 the capability for non-root users to
220       add, modify, and delete their own share definitions has been added.
221       This capability is called usershares and is controlled by a set of
222       parameters in the [global] section of the smb.conf. The relevant
223       parameters are :
224
225       usershare allow guests
226           Controls if usershares can permit guest access.
227
228       usershare max shares
229           Maximum number of user defined shares allowed.
230
231       usershare owner only
232           If set only directories owned by the sharing user can be shared.
233
234       usershare path
235           Points to the directory containing the user defined share
236           definitions. The filesystem permissions on this directory control
237           who can create user defined shares.
238
239       usershare prefix allow list
240           Comma-separated list of absolute pathnames restricting what
241           directories can be shared. Only directories below the pathnames in
242           this list are permitted.
243
244       usershare prefix deny list
245           Comma-separated list of absolute pathnames restricting what
246           directories can be shared. Directories below the pathnames in this
247           list are prohibited.
248
249       usershare template share
250           Names a pre-existing share used as a template for creating new
251           usershares. All other share parameters not specified in the user
252           defined share definition are copied from this named share.
253
254       To allow members of the UNIX group foo to create user defined shares,
255       create the directory to contain the share definitions as follows:
256
257       Become root:
258
259           mkdir /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
260           chgrp foo /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
261           chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
262
263       Then add the parameters
264
265                usershare path = /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
266                usershare max shares = 10 # (or the desired number of shares)
267
268       to the global section of your smb.conf. Members of the group foo may
269       then manipulate the user defined shares using the following commands.
270
271       net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]
272           To create or modify (overwrite) a user defined share.
273
274       net usershare delete sharename
275           To delete a user defined share.
276
277       net usershare list wildcard-sharename
278           To list user defined shares.
279
280       net usershare info wildcard-sharename
281           To print information about user defined shares.
282

PARAMETERS

284       Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.
285
286       Some parameters are specific to the [global] section (e.g., security).
287       Some parameters are usable in all sections (e.g., create mask). All
288       others are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the
289       following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] sections will be
290       considered normal. The letter G in parentheses indicates that a
291       parameter is specific to the [global] section. The letter S indicates
292       that a parameter can be specified in a service specific section. All S
293       parameters can also be specified in the [global] section - in which
294       case they will define the default behavior for all services.
295
296       Parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not
297       create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there are
298       synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the
299       preferred synonym.
300

VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS

302       Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take
303       substitutions. For example the option “path = /tmp/%u” is interpreted
304       as “path = /tmp/john” if the user connected with the username john.
305
306       These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, but
307       there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they might be
308       relevant. These are:
309
310       %U
311           session username (the username that the client wanted, not
312           necessarily the same as the one they got).
313
314       %G
315           primary group name of %U.
316
317       %h
318           the Internet hostname that Samba is running on.
319
320       %m
321           the NetBIOS name of the client machine (very useful).
322
323           This parameter is not available when Samba listens on port 445, as
324           clients no longer send this information. If you use this macro in
325           an include statement on a domain that has a Samba domain controller
326           be sure to set in the [global] section smb ports = 139. This will
327           cause Samba to not listen on port 445 and will permit include
328           functionality to function as it did with Samba 2.x.
329
330       %L
331           the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you to change your
332           config based on what the client calls you. Your server can have a
333           “dual personality”.
334
335       %M
336           the Internet name of the client machine.
337
338       %R
339           the selected protocol level after protocol negotiation. It can be
340           one of CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2, NT1, SMB2_02, SMB2_10,
341           SMB2_22, SMB2_24, SMB3_00, SMB3_02 or SMB2_FF.
342
343       %d
344           the process id of the current server process.
345
346       %a
347           The architecture of the remote machine. It currently recognizes
348           Samba (Samba), the Linux CIFS file system (CIFSFS), OS/2, (OS2),
349           Mac OS X (OSX), Windows for Workgroups (WfWg), Windows 9x/ME
350           (Win95), Windows NT (WinNT), Windows 2000 (Win2K), Windows XP
351           (WinXP), Windows XP 64-bit(WinXP64), Windows 2003 including 2003R2
352           (Win2K3), and Windows Vista (Vista). Anything else will be known as
353           UNKNOWN.
354
355       %I
356           the IP address of the client machine.
357
358           Before 4.0.0 it could contain IPv4 mapped IPv6 addresses, now it
359           only contains IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.
360
361       %i
362           the local IP address to which a client connected.
363
364           Before 4.0.0 it could contain IPv4 mapped IPv6 addresses, now it
365           only contains IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.
366
367       %T
368           the current date and time.
369
370       %D
371           name of the domain or workgroup of the current user.
372
373       %w
374           the winbind separator.
375
376       %$(envvar)
377           the value of the environment variable envar.
378
379       The following substitutes apply only to some configuration options
380       (only those that are used when a connection has been established):
381
382       %S
383           the name of the current service, if any.
384
385       %P
386           the root directory of the current service, if any.
387
388       %u
389           username of the current service, if any.
390
391       %g
392           primary group name of %u.
393
394       %H
395           the home directory of the user given by %u.
396
397       %N
398           the name of your NIS home directory server. This is obtained from
399           your NIS auto.map entry. If you have not compiled Samba with the
400           --with-automount option, this value will be the same as %L.
401
402       %p
403           the path of the service´s home directory, obtained from your NIS
404           auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry is split up as %N:%p.
405
406       There are some quite creative things that can be done with these
407       substitutions and other smb.conf options.
408

NAME MANGLING

410       Samba supports name mangling so that DOS and Windows clients can use
411       files that don´t conform to the 8.3 format. It can also be set to
412       adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames.
413
414       There are several options that control the way mangling is performed,
415       and they are grouped here rather than listed separately. For the
416       defaults look at the output of the testparm program.
417
418       These options can be set separately for each service.
419
420       The options are:
421
422       case sensitive = yes/no/auto
423           controls whether filenames are case sensitive. If they aren´t,
424           Samba must do a filename search and match on passed names. The
425           default setting of auto allows clients that support case sensitive
426           filenames (Linux CIFSVFS and smbclient 3.0.5 and above currently)
427           to tell the Samba server on a per-packet basis that they wish to
428           access the file system in a case-sensitive manner (to support UNIX
429           case sensitive semantics). No Windows or DOS system supports
430           case-sensitive filename so setting this option to auto is that same
431           as setting it to no for them. Default auto.
432
433       default case = upper/lower
434           controls what the default case is for new filenames (ie. files that
435           don´t currently exist in the filesystem). Default lower. IMPORTANT
436           NOTE: As part of the optimizations for directories containing large
437           numbers of files, the following special case applies. If the
438           options case sensitive = yes, preserve case = No, and short
439           preserve case = No are set, then the case of all incoming client
440           filenames, not just new filenames, will be modified. See additional
441           notes below.
442
443       preserve case = yes/no
444           controls whether new files (ie. files that don´t currently exist in
445           the filesystem) are created with the case that the client passes,
446           or if they are forced to be the default case. Default yes.
447
448       short preserve case = yes/no
449           controls if new files (ie. files that don´t currently exist in the
450           filesystem) which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case
451           and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are
452           forced to be the default case. This option can be used with
453           preserve case = yes to permit long filenames to retain their case,
454           while short names are lowercased. Default yes.
455
456       By default, Samba 3.0 has the same semantics as a Windows NT server, in
457       that it is case insensitive but case preserving. As a special case for
458       directories with large numbers of files, if the case options are set as
459       follows, "case sensitive = yes", "case preserve = no", "short preserve
460       case = no" then the "default case" option will be applied and will
461       modify all filenames sent from the client when accessing this share.
462

REGISTRY-BASED CONFIGURATION

464       Starting with Samba version 3.2.0, the capability to store Samba
465       configuration in the registry is available. The configuration is stored
466       in the registry key HKLM\Software\Samba\smbconf. There are two levels
467       of registry configuration:
468
469        1. Share definitions stored in registry are used. This is triggered by
470           setting the global parameter registry shares to “yes” in smb.conf.
471
472           The registry shares are loaded not at startup but on demand at
473           runtime by smbd. Shares defined in smb.conf take priority over
474           shares of the same name defined in registry.
475
476        2. Global smb.conf options stored in registry are used. This can be
477           activated in two different ways:
478
479           Firstly, a registry only configuration is triggered by setting
480           config backend = registry in the [global] section of smb.conf. This
481           resets everything that has been read from config files to this
482           point and reads the content of the global configuration section
483           from the registry. This is the recommended method of using registry
484           based configuration.
485
486           Secondly, a mixed configuration can be activated by a special new
487           meaning of the parameter include = registry in the [global] section
488           of smb.conf. This reads the global options from registry with the
489           same priorities as for an include of a text file. This may be
490           especially useful in cases where an initial configuration is needed
491           to access the registry.
492
493           Activation of global registry options automatically activates
494           registry shares. So in the registry only case, shares are loaded on
495           demand only.
496
497
498       Note: To make registry-based configurations foolproof at least to a
499       certain extent, the use of lock directory and config backend inside the
500       registry configuration has been disabled: Especially by changing the
501       lock directory inside the registry configuration, one would create a
502       broken setup where the daemons do not see the configuration they loaded
503       once it is active.
504
505       The registry configuration can be accessed with tools like regedit or
506       net (rpc) registry in the key HKLM\Software\Samba\smbconf. More
507       conveniently, the conf subcommand of the net(8) utility offers a
508       dedicated interface to read and write the registry based configuration
509       locally, i.e. directly accessing the database file, circumventing the
510       server.
511

EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER

513       bind interfaces only (G)
514
515           This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what
516           interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. It affects file
517           service smbd(8) and name service nmbd(8) in a slightly different
518           ways.
519
520           For name service it causes nmbd to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the
521           interfaces listed in the interfaces parameter.  nmbd also binds to
522           the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0) on ports 137 and 138 for
523           the purposes of reading broadcast messages. If this option is not
524           set then nmbd will service name requests on all of these sockets.
525           If bind interfaces only is set then nmbd will check the source
526           address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets and
527           discard any that don´t match the broadcast addresses of the
528           interfaces in the interfaces parameter list. As unicast packets are
529           received on the other sockets it allows nmbd to refuse to serve
530           names to machines that send packets that arrive through any
531           interfaces not listed in the interfaces list. IP Source address
532           spoofing does defeat this simple check, however, so it must not be
533           used seriously as a security feature for nmbd.
534
535           For file service it causes smbd(8) to bind only to the interface
536           list given in the interfaces parameter. This restricts the networks
537           that smbd will serve, to packets coming in on those interfaces.
538           Note that you should not use this parameter for machines that are
539           serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network
540           interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces.
541
542           If bind interfaces only is set and the network address 127.0.0.1 is
543           not added to the interfaces parameter list smbpasswd(8) may not
544           work as expected due to the reasons covered below.
545
546           To change a users SMB password, the smbpasswd by default connects
547           to the localhost - 127.0.0.1 address as an SMB client to issue the
548           password change request. If bind interfaces only is set then unless
549           the network address 127.0.0.1 is added to the interfaces parameter
550           list then smbpasswd will fail to connect in it´s default mode.
551           smbpasswd can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the
552           local host by using its smbpasswd(8) -r remote machine parameter,
553           with remote machine set to the IP name of the primary interface of
554           the local host.
555
556           Default: bind interfaces only = no
557
558       comment (S)
559
560           This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client
561           does a queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or
562           via net view to list what shares are available.
563
564           If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the machine
565           name then see the server string parameter.
566
567           Default: comment =  # No comment
568
569           Example: comment = Fred´s Files
570
571       config backend (G)
572
573           This controls the backend for storing the configuration. Possible
574           values are file (the default) and registry. When config backend =
575           registry is encountered while loading smb.conf, the configuration
576           read so far is dropped and the global options are read from
577           registry instead. So this triggers a registry only configuration.
578           Share definitions are not read immediately but instead registry
579           shares is set to yes.
580
581           Note: This option can not be set inside the registry configuration
582           itself.
583
584           Default: config backend = file
585
586           Example: config backend = registry
587
588       dos charset (G)
589
590           DOS SMB clients assume the server has the same charset as they do.
591           This option specifies which charset Samba should talk to DOS
592           clients.
593
594           The default depends on which charsets you have installed. Samba
595           tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in case it is not
596           available. Run testparm(1) to check the default on your system.
597
598           No default
599
600       enable core files (G)
601
602           This parameter specifies whether core dumps should be written on
603           internal exits. Normally set to yes. You should never need to
604           change this.
605
606           Default: enable core files = yes
607
608           Example: enable core files = no
609
610       interfaces (G)
611
612           This option allows you to override the default network interfaces
613           list that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other
614           NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NBT) traffic. By default Samba will query the
615           kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any interfaces
616           except 127.0.0.1 that are broadcast capable.
617
618           The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string can be in
619           any of the following forms:
620
621           ·   a network interface name (such as eth0). This may include
622               shell-like wildcards so eth* will match any interface starting
623               with the substring "eth"
624
625           ·   an IP address. In this case the netmask is determined from the
626               list of interfaces obtained from the kernel
627
628           ·   an IP/mask pair.
629
630           ·   a broadcast/mask pair.
631
632       The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such as 24 for a C
633       class network) or a full netmask in dotted decimal form.
634
635       The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted decimal IP
636       address or a hostname which will be looked up via the OS´s normal
637       hostname resolution mechanisms.
638
639       By default Samba enables all active interfaces that are broadcast
640       capable except the loopback adaptor (IP address 127.0.0.1).
641
642       The example below configures three network interfaces corresponding to
643       the eth0 device and IP addresses 192.168.2.10 and 192.168.3.10. The
644       netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255.255.255.0.
645
646       Default: interfaces =
647
648       Example: interfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0
649
650       multicast dns register (G)
651
652           If compiled with proper support for it, Samba will announce itself
653           with multicast DNS services like for example provided by the Avahi
654           daemon.
655
656           This parameter allows disabling Samba to register itself.
657
658           Default: multicast dns register = yes
659
660       netbios aliases (G)
661
662           This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will advertise as
663           additional names by which the Samba server is known. This allows
664           one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a
665           machine is acting as a browse server or logon server none of these
666           names will be advertised as either browse server or logon servers,
667           only the primary name of the machine will be advertised with these
668           capabilities.
669
670           Default: netbios aliases =  # empty string (no additional names)
671
672           Example: netbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2
673
674       netbios name (G)
675
676           This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known. By
677           default it is the same as the first component of the host´s DNS
678           name. If a machine is a browse server or logon server this name (or
679           the first component of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that
680           these services are advertised under.
681
682           Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 charactars.
683
684           There is a bug in Samba that breaks operation of browsing and
685           access to shares if the netbios name is set to the literal name
686           PIPE. To avoid this problem, do not name your Samba server PIPE.
687
688           Default: netbios name =  # machine DNS name
689
690           Example: netbios name = MYNAME
691
692       netbios scope (G)
693
694           This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under. This
695           should not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this
696           value.
697
698           Default: netbios scope =
699
700       directory
701
702           This parameter is a synonym for path.
703
704       path (S)
705
706           This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the
707           service is to be given access. In the case of printable services,
708           this is where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the
709           host for printing.
710
711           For a printable service offering guest access, the service should
712           be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and have the
713           sticky bit set. This is not mandatory of course, but you probably
714           won´t get the results you expect if you do otherwise.
715
716           Any occurrences of %u in the path will be replaced with the UNIX
717           username that the client is using on this connection. Any
718           occurrences of %m will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the
719           machine they are connecting from. These replacements are very
720           useful for setting up pseudo home directories for users.
721
722           Note that this path will be based on root dir if one was specified.
723
724           Default: path =
725
726           Example: path = /home/fred
727
728       realm (G)
729
730           This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is used
731           as the ADS equivalent of the NT4 domain. It is usually set to the
732           DNS name of the kerberos server.
733
734           Default: realm =
735
736           Example: realm = mysambabox.mycompany.com
737
738       server services (G)
739
740           This option contains the services that the Samba daemon will run.
741
742           An entry in the smb.conf file can either override the previous
743           value completely or entries can be removed from or added to it by
744           prefixing them with + or -.
745
746           Default: server services = s3fs, rpc, nbt, wrepl, ldap, cldap, kdc,
747           drepl, winbindd, ntp_signd, kcc, dnsupdate, dns
748
749           Example: server services = -s3fs, +smb
750
751       server string (G)
752
753           This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box
754           in print manager and next to the IPC connection in net view. It can
755           be any string that you wish to show to your users.
756
757           It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine
758           name.
759
760           A %v will be replaced with the Samba version number.
761
762           A %h will be replaced with the hostname.
763
764           Default: server string = Samba %v
765
766           Example: server string = University of GNUs Samba Server
767
768       share backend (G)
769
770           This option specifies the backend that will be used to access the
771           configuration of file shares.
772
773           Traditionally, Samba file shares have been configured in the
774           smb.conf file and this is still the default.
775
776           At the moment there are no other supported backends.
777
778           Default: share backend = classic
779
780       unix charset (G)
781
782           Specifies the charset the unix machine Samba runs on uses. Samba
783           needs to know this in order to be able to convert text to the
784           charsets other SMB clients use.
785
786           This is also the charset Samba will use when specifying arguments
787           to scripts that it invokes.
788
789           Default: unix charset = UTF-8
790
791           Example: unix charset = ASCII
792
793       workgroup (G)
794
795           This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when
796           queried by clients. Note that this parameter also controls the
797           Domain name used with the security = domain setting.
798
799           Default: workgroup = WORKGROUP
800
801           Example: workgroup = MYGROUP
802
803       administrative share (S)
804
805           If this parameter is set to yes for a share, then the share will be
806           an administrative share. The Administrative Shares are the default
807           network shares created by all Windows NT-based operating systems.
808           These are shares like C$, D$ or ADMIN$. The type of these shares is
809           STYPE_DISKTREE_HIDDEN.
810
811           See the section below on security for more information about this
812           option.
813
814           Default: administrative share = no
815
816       browsable
817
818           This parameter is a synonym for browseable.
819
820       browseable (S)
821
822           This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available
823           shares in a net view and in the browse list.
824
825           Default: browseable = yes
826
827       browse list (G)
828
829           This controls whether smbd(8) will serve a browse list to a client
830           doing a NetServerEnum call. Normally set to yes. You should never
831           need to change this.
832
833           Default: browse list = yes
834
835       domain master (G)
836
837           Tell smbd(8) to enable WAN-wide browse list collation. Setting this
838           option causes nmbd to claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name
839           that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given
840           workgroup. Local master browsers in the same workgroup on
841           broadcast-isolated subnets will give this nmbd their local browse
842           lists, and then ask smbd(8) for a complete copy of the browse list
843           for the whole wide area network. Browser clients will then contact
844           their local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse
845           list, instead of just the list for their broadcast-isolated subnet.
846
847           Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able
848           to claim this workgroup specific special NetBIOS name that
849           identifies them as domain master browsers for that workgroup by
850           default (i.e. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from
851           attempting to do this). This means that if this parameter is set
852           and nmbd claims the special name for a workgroup before a Windows
853           NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave
854           strangely and may fail.
855
856           If domain logons = yes, then the default behavior is to enable the
857           domain master parameter. If domain logons is not enabled (the
858           default setting), then neither will domain master be enabled by
859           default.
860
861           When domain logons = Yes the default setting for this parameter is
862           Yes, with the result that Samba will be a PDC. If domain master =
863           No, Samba will function as a BDC. In general, this parameter should
864           be set to ´No´ only on a BDC.
865
866           Default: domain master = auto
867
868       enhanced browsing (G)
869
870           This option enables a couple of enhancements to cross-subnet browse
871           propagation that have been added in Samba but which are not
872           standard in Microsoft implementations.
873
874           The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular
875           wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master
876           Browsers, followed by a browse synchronization with each of the
877           returned DMBs. The second enhancement consists of a regular
878           randomised browse synchronization with all currently known DMBs.
879
880           You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with
881           empty workgroups not disappearing from browse lists. Due to the
882           restrictions of the browse protocols, these enhancements can cause
883           a empty workgroup to stay around forever which can be annoying.
884
885           In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes
886           cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable.
887
888           Default: enhanced browsing = yes
889
890       lm announce (G)
891
892           This parameter determines if nmbd(8) will produce Lanman announce
893           broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see
894           the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have
895           three values, yes, no, or auto. The default is auto. If set to no
896           Samba will never produce these broadcasts. If set to yes Samba will
897           produce Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the
898           parameter lm interval. If set to auto Samba will not send Lanman
899           announce broadcasts by default but will listen for them. If it
900           hears such a broadcast on the wire it will then start sending them
901           at a frequency set by the parameter lm interval.
902
903           Default: lm announce = auto
904
905           Example: lm announce = yes
906
907       lm interval (G)
908
909           If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by
910           OS/2 clients (see the lm announce parameter) then this parameter
911           defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be made. If
912           this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be made
913           despite the setting of the lm announce parameter.
914
915           Default: lm interval = 60
916
917           Example: lm interval = 120
918
919       local master (G)
920
921           This option allows nmbd(8) to try and become a local master browser
922           on a subnet. If set to no then nmbd will not attempt to become a
923           local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing
924           elections. By default this value is set to yes. Setting this value
925           to yes doesn´t mean that Samba will become the local master browser
926           on a subnet, just that nmbd will participate in elections for local
927           master browser.
928
929           Setting this value to no will cause nmbd never to become a local
930           master browser.
931
932           Default: local master = yes
933
934       os level (G)
935
936           This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as
937           for browse elections. The value of this parameter determines
938           whether nmbd(8) has a chance of becoming a local master browser for
939           the workgroup in the local broadcast area.
940
941            Note: By default, Samba will win a local master browsing election
942           over all Microsoft operating systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000
943           Domain Controller. This means that a misconfigured Samba host can
944           effectively isolate a subnet for browsing purposes. This parameter
945           is largely auto-configured in the Samba-3 release series and it is
946           seldom necessary to manually override the default setting. Please
947           refer to the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba-3 HOWTO
948           document for further information regarding the use of this
949           parameter.  Note: The maximum value for this parameter is 255. If
950           you use higher values, counting will start at 0!
951
952           Default: os level = 20
953
954           Example: os level = 65
955
956       prefered master
957
958           This parameter is a synonym for preferred master.
959
960       preferred master (G)
961
962           This boolean parameter controls if nmbd(8) is a preferred master
963           browser for its workgroup.
964
965           If this is set to yes, on startup, nmbd will force an election, and
966           it will have a slight advantage in winning the election. It is
967           recommended that this parameter is used in conjunction with domain
968           master = yes, so that nmbd can guarantee becoming a domain master.
969
970           Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts
971           (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred master
972           browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically and
973           continuously attempt to become the local master browser. This will
974           result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing
975           capabilities.
976
977           Default: preferred master = auto
978
979       allow dns updates (G)
980
981           This option determines what kind of updates to the DNS are allowed.
982
983           DNS updates can either be disallowed completely by setting it to
984           disabled, enabled over secure connections only by setting it to
985           secure only or allowed in all cases by setting it to nonsecure.
986
987           Default: allow dns updates = secure only
988
989           Example: allow dns updates = disabled
990
991       dns forwarder (G)
992
993           This option specifies the DNS server that DNS requests will be
994           forwarded to if they can not be handled by Samba itself.
995
996           The DNS forwarder is only used if the internal DNS server in Samba
997           is used.
998
999           Default: dns forwarder =
1000
1001           Example: dns forwarder = 192.168.0.1
1002
1003       dns update command (G)
1004
1005           This option sets the command that is called when there are DNS
1006           updates. It should update the local machines DNS names using
1007           TSIG-GSS.
1008
1009           Default: dns update command =
1010           /builddir/build/BUILD/samba-4.2.10/source4/scripting/bin/samba_dnsupdate
1011
1012           Example: dns update command = /usr/local/sbin/dnsupdate
1013
1014       machine password timeout (G)
1015
1016           If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the
1017           security = domain parameter) then periodically a running smbd
1018           process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in
1019           the TDB called private/secrets.tdb (or private/secrets.ntdb). This
1020           parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in
1021           seconds. The default is one week (expressed in seconds), the same
1022           as a Windows NT Domain member server.
1023
1024           See also smbpasswd(8), and the security = domain parameter.
1025
1026           Default: machine password timeout = 604800
1027
1028       nsupdate command (G)
1029
1030           This option sets the path to the nsupdate command which is used for
1031           GSS-TSIG dynamic DNS updates.
1032
1033           Default: nsupdate command = /usr/bin/nsupdate -g
1034
1035       rndc command (G)
1036
1037           This option specifies the path to the name server control utility.
1038
1039           The rndc utility should be a part of the bind installation.
1040
1041           Default: rndc command = /usr/sbin/rndc
1042
1043           Example: rndc command = /usr/local/bind9/sbin/rndc
1044
1045       spn update command (G)
1046
1047           This option sets the command that for updating servicePrincipalName
1048           names from spn_update_list.
1049
1050           Default: spn update command =
1051           /builddir/build/BUILD/samba-4.2.10/source4/scripting/bin/samba_spnupdate
1052
1053           Example: spn update command = /usr/local/sbin/spnupdate
1054
1055       casesignames
1056
1057           This parameter is a synonym for case sensitive.
1058
1059       case sensitive (S)
1060
1061           See the discussion in the section name mangling.
1062
1063           Default: case sensitive = auto
1064
1065       default case (S)
1066
1067           See the section on name mangling. Also note the short preserve case
1068           parameter.
1069
1070           Default: default case = lower
1071
1072       delete veto files (S)
1073
1074           This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory
1075           that contains one or more vetoed directories (see the veto files
1076           option). If this option is set to no (the default) then if a vetoed
1077           directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the
1078           directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.
1079
1080           If this option is set to yes, then Samba will attempt to
1081           recursively delete any files and directories within the vetoed
1082           directory. This can be useful for integration with file serving
1083           systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within directories
1084           you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing (e.g.
1085           .AppleDouble)
1086
1087           Setting delete veto files = yes allows these directories to be
1088           transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long
1089           as the user has permissions to do so).
1090
1091           Default: delete veto files = no
1092
1093       hide dot files (S)
1094
1095           This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting
1096           with a dot appear as hidden files.
1097
1098           Default: hide dot files = yes
1099
1100       hide files (S)
1101
1102           This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are
1103           accessible. The DOS ´hidden´ attribute is applied to any files or
1104           directories that match.
1105
1106           Each entry in the list must be separated by a ´/´, which allows
1107           spaces to be included in the entry. ´*´ and ´?´ can be used to
1108           specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards.
1109
1110           Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must not include
1111           the Unix directory separator ´/´.
1112
1113           Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable in hiding
1114           files.
1115
1116           Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it
1117           will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as
1118           they are scanned.
1119
1120           The example shown above is based on files that the Macintosh SMB
1121           client (DAVE) available from Thursby creates for internal use, and
1122           also still hides all files beginning with a dot.
1123
1124           An example of us of this parameter is:
1125
1126               hide files = /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/
1127
1128           Default: hide files =  # no file are hidden
1129
1130       hide special files (S)
1131
1132           This parameter prevents clients from seeing special files such as
1133           sockets, devices and fifo´s in directory listings.
1134
1135           Default: hide special files = no
1136
1137       hide unreadable (S)
1138
1139           This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files
1140           that cannot be read. Defaults to off.
1141
1142           Please note that enabling this can slow down listing large
1143           directories significantly. Samba has to evaluate the ACLs of all
1144           directory members, which can be a lot of effort.
1145
1146           Default: hide unreadable = no
1147
1148       hide unwriteable files (S)
1149
1150           This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files
1151           that cannot be written to. Defaults to off. Note that unwriteable
1152           directories are shown as usual.
1153
1154           Please note that enabling this can slow down listing large
1155           directories significantly. Samba has to evaluate the ACLs of all
1156           directory members, which can be a lot of effort.
1157
1158           Default: hide unwriteable files = no
1159
1160       mangled names (S)
1161
1162           This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to
1163           DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether
1164           non-DOS names should simply be ignored.
1165
1166           See the section on name mangling for details on how to control the
1167           mangling process.
1168
1169           If mangling is used then the mangling method is as follows:
1170
1171           ·   The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the
1172               rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper
1173               case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters of the
1174               mangled name.
1175
1176           ·   A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled name,
1177               followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the
1178               original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final
1179               extension). The final extension is included in the hash
1180               calculation only if it contains any upper case characters or is
1181               longer than three characters.
1182
1183               Note that the character to use may be specified using the
1184               mangling char option, if you don´t like ´~´.
1185
1186           ·   Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as
1187               DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as for other
1188               filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as its
1189               extension regardless of actual original extension (that´s three
1190               underscores).
1191
1192       The two-digit hash value consists of upper case alphanumeric
1193       characters.
1194
1195       This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files in a directory
1196       share the same first five alphanumeric characters. The probability of
1197       such a clash is 1/1300.
1198
1199       The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be copied between UNIX
1200       directories from Windows/DOS while retaining the long UNIX filename.
1201       UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension from Windows/DOS and will
1202       retain the same basename. Mangled names do not change between sessions.
1203
1204       Default: mangled names = yes
1205
1206       mangle prefix (G)
1207
1208           controls the number of prefix characters from the original name
1209           used when generating the mangled names. A larger value will give a
1210           weaker hash and therefore more name collisions. The minimum value
1211           is 1 and the maximum value is 6.
1212
1213           mangle prefix is effective only when mangling method is hash2.
1214
1215           Default: mangle prefix = 1
1216
1217           Example: mangle prefix = 4
1218
1219       mangling char (S)
1220
1221           This controls what character is used as the magic character in name
1222           mangling. The default is a ´~´ but this may interfere with some
1223           software. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer. This is
1224           effective only when mangling method is hash.
1225
1226           Default: mangling char = ~
1227
1228           Example: mangling char = ^
1229
1230       mangling method (G)
1231
1232           controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names.
1233           Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2". "hash" is the
1234           algorithm that was used in Samba for many years and was the default
1235           in Samba 2.2.x "hash2" is now the default and is newer and
1236           considered a better algorithm (generates less collisions) in the
1237           names. Many Win32 applications store the mangled names and so
1238           changing to algorithms must not be done lightly as these
1239           applications may break unless reinstalled.
1240
1241           Default: mangling method = hash2
1242
1243           Example: mangling method = hash
1244
1245       map archive (S)
1246
1247           This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to
1248           the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit is set when a file
1249           has been modified since its last backup. One motivation for this
1250           option is to keep Samba/your PC from making any file it touches
1251           from becoming executable under UNIX. This can be quite annoying for
1252           shared source code, documents, etc...
1253
1254           Note that this parameter will be ignored if the store dos
1255           attributes parameter is set, as the DOS archive attribute will then
1256           be stored inside a UNIX extended attribute.
1257
1258           Note that this requires the create mask parameter to be set such
1259           that owner execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include
1260           100). See the parameter create mask for details.
1261
1262           Default: map archive = yes
1263
1264       map hidden (S)
1265
1266           This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to
1267           the UNIX world execute bit.
1268
1269           Note that this parameter will be ignored if the store dos
1270           attributes parameter is set, as the DOS hidden attribute will then
1271           be stored inside a UNIX extended attribute.
1272
1273           Note that this requires the create mask to be set such that the
1274           world execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 001). See
1275           the parameter create mask for details.
1276
1277           Default: map hidden = no
1278
1279       map readonly (S)
1280
1281           This controls how the DOS read only attribute should be mapped from
1282           a UNIX filesystem.
1283
1284           This parameter can take three different values, which tell smbd(8)
1285           how to display the read only attribute on files, where either store
1286           dos attributes is set to No, or no extended attribute is present.
1287           If store dos attributes is set to yes then this parameter is
1288           ignored. This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version
1289           3.0.21.
1290
1291           The three settings are :
1292
1293           ·    Yes - The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the inverse of
1294               the user or owner write bit in the unix permission mode set. If
1295               the owner write bit is not set, the read only attribute is
1296               reported as being set on the file. If the read only DOS
1297               attribute is set, Samba sets the owner, group and others write
1298               bits to zero. Write bits set in an ACL are ignored by Samba. If
1299               the read only DOS attribute is unset, Samba simply sets the
1300               write bit of the owner to one.
1301
1302           ·    Permissions - The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the
1303               effective permissions of the connecting user, as evaluated by
1304               smbd(8) by reading the unix permissions and POSIX ACL (if
1305               present). If the connecting user does not have permission to
1306               modify the file, the read only attribute is reported as being
1307               set on the file.
1308
1309           ·    No - The read only DOS attribute is unaffected by permissions,
1310               and can only be set by the store dos attributes method. This
1311               may be useful for exporting mounted CDs.
1312
1313       Note that this parameter will be ignored if the store dos attributes
1314       parameter is set, as the DOS ´read-only´ attribute will then be stored
1315       inside a UNIX extended attribute.
1316
1317       Default: map readonly = yes
1318
1319       map system (S)
1320
1321           This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to
1322           the UNIX group execute bit.
1323
1324           Note that this parameter will be ignored if the store dos
1325           attributes parameter is set, as the DOS system attribute will then
1326           be stored inside a UNIX extended attribute.
1327
1328           Note that this requires the create mask to be set such that the
1329           group execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 010). See
1330           the parameter create mask for details.
1331
1332           Default: map system = no
1333
1334       max stat cache size (G)
1335
1336           This parameter limits the size in memory of any stat cache being
1337           used to speed up case insensitive name mappings. It represents the
1338           number of kilobyte (1024) units the stat cache can use. A value of
1339           zero, meaning unlimited, is not advisable due to increased memory
1340           usage. You should not need to change this parameter.
1341
1342           Default: max stat cache size = 256
1343
1344           Example: max stat cache size = 100
1345
1346       preserve case (S)
1347
1348           This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the
1349           client passes, or if they are forced to be the default case.
1350
1351           See the section on NAME MANGLING for a fuller discussion.
1352
1353           Default: preserve case = yes
1354
1355       short preserve case (S)
1356
1357           This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3
1358           syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are
1359           created upper case, or if they are forced to be the default case.
1360           This option can be use with preserve case = yes to permit long
1361           filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowered.
1362
1363           See the section on NAME MANGLING.
1364
1365           Default: short preserve case = yes
1366
1367       stat cache (G)
1368
1369           This parameter determines if smbd(8) will use a cache in order to
1370           speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need to
1371           change this parameter.
1372
1373           Default: stat cache = yes
1374
1375       store dos attributes (S)
1376
1377           If this parameter is set Samba attempts to first read DOS
1378           attributes (SYSTEM, HIDDEN, ARCHIVE or READ-ONLY) from a filesystem
1379           extended attribute, before mapping DOS attributes to UNIX
1380           permission bits (such as occurs with map hidden and map readonly).
1381           When set, DOS attributes will be stored onto an extended attribute
1382           in the UNIX filesystem, associated with the file or directory. When
1383           this parameter is set it will override the parameters map hidden,
1384           map system, map archive and map readonly and they will behave as if
1385           they were set to off. This parameter writes the DOS attributes as a
1386           string into the extended attribute named "user.DOSATTRIB". This
1387           extended attribute is explicitly hidden from smbd clients
1388           requesting an EA list. On Linux the filesystem must have been
1389           mounted with the mount option user_xattr in order for extended
1390           attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into
1391           the Linux kernel. In Samba 3.5.0 and above the "user.DOSATTRIB"
1392           extended attribute has been extended to store the create time for a
1393           file as well as the DOS attributes. This is done in a backwards
1394           compatible way so files created by Samba 3.5.0 and above can still
1395           have the DOS attribute read from this extended attribute by earlier
1396           versions of Samba, but they will not be able to read the create
1397           time stored there. Storing the create time separately from the
1398           normal filesystem meta-data allows Samba to faithfully reproduce
1399           NTFS semantics on top of a POSIX filesystem.
1400
1401           Default: store dos attributes = no
1402
1403       veto files (S)
1404
1405           This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible
1406           nor accessible. Each entry in the list must be separated by a ´/´,
1407           which allows spaces to be included in the entry. ´*´ and ´?´ can be
1408           used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards.
1409
1410           Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must not include
1411           the unix directory separator ´/´.
1412
1413           Note that the case sensitive option is applicable in vetoing files.
1414
1415           One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be
1416           aware of is Samba´s behaviour when trying to delete a directory. If
1417           a directory that is to be deleted contains nothing but veto files
1418           this deletion will fail unless you also set the delete veto files
1419           parameter to yes.
1420
1421           Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it
1422           will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as
1423           they are scanned.
1424
1425           Examples of use include:
1426
1427               ; Veto any files containing the word Security,
1428               ; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the
1429               ; word root.
1430               veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/
1431
1432               ; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server
1433               ; creates.
1434               veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/
1435
1436           Default: veto files =  # No files or directories are vetoed
1437
1438       veto oplock files (S)
1439
1440           This parameter is only valid when the oplocks parameter is turned
1441           on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator to selectively
1442           turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that match a
1443           wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the veto
1444           files parameter.
1445
1446           You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily
1447           contended for by clients. A good example of this is in the NetBench
1448           SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy client contention for
1449           files ending in .SEM. To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these
1450           files you would use the line (either in the [global] section or in
1451           the section for the particular NetBench share.
1452
1453           An example of use is:
1454
1455               veto oplock files = /.*SEM/
1456
1457           Default: veto oplock files =  # No files are vetoed for oplock
1458           grants
1459
1460       client ldap sasl wrapping (G)
1461
1462           The client ldap sasl wrapping defines whether ldap traffic will be
1463           signed or signed and encrypted (sealed). Possible values are plain,
1464           sign and seal.
1465
1466           The values sign and seal are only available if Samba has been
1467           compiled against a modern OpenLDAP version (2.3.x or higher).
1468
1469           This option is needed in the case of Domain Controllers enforcing
1470           the usage of signed LDAP connections (e.g. Windows 2000 SP3 or
1471           higher). LDAP sign and seal can be controlled with the registry key
1472           "HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\
1473           NTDS\Parameters\LDAPServerIntegrity" on the Windows server side.
1474
1475           Depending on the used KRB5 library (MIT and older Heimdal versions)
1476           it is possible that the message "integrity only" is not supported.
1477           In this case, sign is just an alias for seal.
1478
1479           The default value is sign. That implies synchronizing the time with
1480           the KDC in the case of using Kerberos.
1481
1482           Default: client ldap sasl wrapping = sign
1483
1484       ldap admin dn (G)
1485
1486           The ldap admin dn defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by
1487           Samba to contact the ldap server when retreiving user account
1488           information. The ldap admin dn is used in conjunction with the
1489           admin dn password stored in the private/secrets.tdb (or
1490           private/secrets.ntdb) file. See the smbpasswd(8) man page for more
1491           information on how to accomplish this.
1492
1493           The ldap admin dn requires a fully specified DN. The ldap suffix is
1494           not appended to the ldap admin dn.
1495
1496           No default
1497
1498       ldap connection timeout (G)
1499
1500           This parameter tells the LDAP library calls which timeout in
1501           seconds they should honor during initial connection establishments
1502           to LDAP servers. It is very useful in failover scenarios in
1503           particular. If one or more LDAP servers are not reachable at all,
1504           we do not have to wait until TCP timeouts are over. This feature
1505           must be supported by your LDAP library.
1506
1507           This parameter is different from ldap timeout which affects
1508           operations on LDAP servers using an existing connection and not
1509           establishing an initial connection.
1510
1511           Default: ldap connection timeout = 2
1512
1513       ldap delete dn (G)
1514
1515           This parameter specifies whether a delete operation in the ldapsam
1516           deletes the complete entry or only the attributes specific to
1517           Samba.
1518
1519           Default: ldap delete dn = no
1520
1521       ldap deref (G)
1522
1523           This option controls whether Samba should tell the LDAP library to
1524           use a certain alias dereferencing method. The default is auto,
1525           which means that the default setting of the ldap client library
1526           will be kept. Other possible values are never, finding, searching
1527           and always. Grab your LDAP manual for more information.
1528
1529           Default: ldap deref = auto
1530
1531           Example: ldap deref = searching
1532
1533       ldap follow referral (G)
1534
1535           This option controls whether to follow LDAP referrals or not when
1536           searching for entries in the LDAP database. Possible values are on
1537           to enable following referrals, off to disable this, and auto, to
1538           use the libldap default settings. libldap´s choice of following
1539           referrals or not is set in /etc/openldap/ldap.conf with the
1540           REFERRALS parameter as documented in ldap.conf(5).
1541
1542           Default: ldap follow referral = auto
1543
1544           Example: ldap follow referral = off
1545
1546       ldap group suffix (G)
1547
1548           This parameter specifies the suffix that is used for groups when
1549           these are added to the LDAP directory. If this parameter is unset,
1550           the value of ldap suffix will be used instead. The suffix string is
1551           pre-pended to the ldap suffix string so use a partial DN.
1552
1553           Default: ldap group suffix =
1554
1555           Example: ldap group suffix = ou=Groups
1556
1557       ldap idmap suffix (G)
1558
1559           This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing
1560           idmap mappings. If this parameter is unset, the value of ldap
1561           suffix will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the
1562           ldap suffix string so use a partial DN.
1563
1564           Default: ldap idmap suffix =
1565
1566           Example: ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap
1567
1568       ldap machine suffix (G)
1569
1570           It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree. If
1571           this parameter is unset, the value of ldap suffix will be used
1572           instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the ldap suffix string
1573           so use a partial DN.
1574
1575           Default: ldap machine suffix =
1576
1577           Example: ldap machine suffix = ou=Computers
1578
1579       ldap page size (G)
1580
1581           This parameter specifies the number of entries per page.
1582
1583           If the LDAP server supports paged results, clients can request
1584           subsets of search results (pages) instead of the entire list. This
1585           parameter specifies the size of these pages.
1586
1587           Default: ldap page size = 1024
1588
1589           Example: ldap page size = 512
1590
1591       ldap password sync
1592
1593           This parameter is a synonym for ldap passwd sync.
1594
1595       ldap passwd sync (G)
1596
1597           This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the
1598           LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT
1599           for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password change via
1600           SAMBA.
1601
1602           The ldap passwd sync can be set to one of three values:
1603
1604           ·   Yes = Try to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update
1605               the pwdLastSet time.
1606
1607           ·   No = Update NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.
1608
1609           ·   Only = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do
1610               the rest.
1611
1612       Default: ldap passwd sync = no
1613
1614       ldap replication sleep (G)
1615
1616           When Samba is asked to write to a read-only LDAP replica, we are
1617           redirected to talk to the read-write master server. This server
1618           then replicates our changes back to the ´local´ server, however the
1619           replication might take some seconds, especially over slow links.
1620           Certain client activities, particularly domain joins, can become
1621           confused by the ´success´ that does not immediately change the LDAP
1622           back-end´s data.
1623
1624           This option simply causes Samba to wait a short time, to allow the
1625           LDAP server to catch up. If you have a particularly high-latency
1626           network, you may wish to time the LDAP replication with a network
1627           sniffer, and increase this value accordingly. Be aware that no
1628           checking is performed that the data has actually replicated.
1629
1630           The value is specified in milliseconds, the maximum value is 5000
1631           (5 seconds).
1632
1633           Default: ldap replication sleep = 1000
1634
1635       ldapsam:editposix (G)
1636
1637           Editposix is an option that leverages ldapsam:trusted to make it
1638           simpler to manage a domain controller eliminating the need to set
1639           up custom scripts to add and manage the posix users and groups.
1640           This option will instead directly manipulate the ldap tree to
1641           create, remove and modify user and group entries. This option also
1642           requires a running winbindd as it is used to allocate new uids/gids
1643           on user/group creation. The allocation range must be therefore
1644           configured.
1645
1646           To use this option, a basic ldap tree must be provided and the ldap
1647           suffix parameters must be properly configured. On virgin servers
1648           the default users and groups (Administrator, Guest, Domain Users,
1649           Domain Admins, Domain Guests) can be precreated with the command
1650           net sam provision. To run this command the ldap server must be
1651           running, Winbindd must be running and the smb.conf ldap options
1652           must be properly configured. The typical ldap setup used with the
1653           ldapsam:trusted = yes option is usually sufficient to use
1654           ldapsam:editposix = yes as well.
1655
1656           An example configuration can be the following:
1657
1658                    encrypt passwords = true
1659                    passdb backend = ldapsam
1660
1661                    ldapsam:trusted=yes
1662                    ldapsam:editposix=yes
1663
1664                    ldap admin dn = cn=admin,dc=samba,dc=org
1665                    ldap delete dn = yes
1666                    ldap group suffix = ou=groups
1667                    ldap idmap suffix = ou=idmap
1668                    ldap machine suffix = ou=computers
1669                    ldap user suffix = ou=users
1670                    ldap suffix = dc=samba,dc=org
1671
1672                    idmap backend = ldap:"ldap://localhost"
1673
1674                    idmap uid = 5000-50000
1675                    idmap gid = 5000-50000
1676
1677
1678           This configuration assumes a directory layout like described in the
1679           following ldif:
1680
1681                    dn: dc=samba,dc=org
1682                    objectClass: top
1683                    objectClass: dcObject
1684                    objectClass: organization
1685                    o: samba.org
1686                    dc: samba
1687
1688                    dn: cn=admin,dc=samba,dc=org
1689                    objectClass: simpleSecurityObject
1690                    objectClass: organizationalRole
1691                    cn: admin
1692                    description: LDAP administrator
1693                    userPassword: secret
1694
1695                    dn: ou=users,dc=samba,dc=org
1696                    objectClass: top
1697                    objectClass: organizationalUnit
1698                    ou: users
1699
1700                    dn: ou=groups,dc=samba,dc=org
1701                    objectClass: top
1702                    objectClass: organizationalUnit
1703                    ou: groups
1704
1705                    dn: ou=idmap,dc=samba,dc=org
1706                    objectClass: top
1707                    objectClass: organizationalUnit
1708                    ou: idmap
1709
1710                    dn: ou=computers,dc=samba,dc=org
1711                    objectClass: top
1712                    objectClass: organizationalUnit
1713                    ou: computers
1714
1715
1716           Default: ldapsam:editposix = no
1717
1718       ldapsam:trusted (G)
1719
1720           By default, Samba as a Domain Controller with an LDAP backend needs
1721           to use the Unix-style NSS subsystem to access user and group
1722           information. Due to the way Unix stores user information in
1723           /etc/passwd and /etc/group this inevitably leads to inefficiencies.
1724           One important question a user needs to know is the list of groups
1725           he is member of. The plain UNIX model involves a complete
1726           enumeration of the file /etc/group and its NSS counterparts in
1727           LDAP. UNIX has optimized functions to enumerate group membership.
1728           Sadly, other functions that are used to deal with user and group
1729           attributes lack such optimization.
1730
1731           To make Samba scale well in large environments, the ldapsam:trusted
1732           = yes option assumes that the complete user and group database that
1733           is relevant to Samba is stored in LDAP with the standard
1734           posixAccount/posixGroup attributes. It further assumes that the
1735           Samba auxiliary object classes are stored together with the POSIX
1736           data in the same LDAP object. If these assumptions are met,
1737           ldapsam:trusted = yes can be activated and Samba can bypass the NSS
1738           system to query user group memberships. Optimized LDAP queries can
1739           greatly speed up domain logon and administration tasks. Depending
1740           on the size of the LDAP database a factor of 100 or more for common
1741           queries is easily achieved.
1742
1743           Default: ldapsam:trusted = no
1744
1745       ldap server require strong auth (G)
1746
1747           The ldap server require strong auth defines whether the ldap server
1748           requires ldap traffic to be signed or signed and encrypted
1749           (sealed). Possible values are no, allow_sasl_over_tls and yes.
1750
1751           A value of no allows simple and sasl binds over all transports.
1752
1753           A value of allow_sasl_over_tls allows simple and sasl binds
1754           (without sign or seal) over TLS encrypted connections. Unencrypted
1755           connections only allow sasl binds with sign or seal.
1756
1757           A value of yes allows only simple binds over TLS encrypted
1758           connections. Unencrypted connections only allow sasl binds with
1759           sign or seal.
1760
1761           Default: ldap server require strong auth = yes
1762
1763       ldap ssl (G)
1764
1765           This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL
1766           when connecting to the ldap server This is NOT related to Samba´s
1767           previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the --with-ssl
1768           option to the configure script.
1769
1770           LDAP connections should be secured where possible. This may be done
1771           setting either this parameter to Start_tls or by specifying
1772           ldaps:// in the URL argument of passdb backend.
1773
1774           The ldap ssl can be set to one of two values:
1775
1776           ·   Off = Never use SSL when querying the directory.
1777
1778           ·   start tls = Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation
1779               (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server.
1780
1781       Please note that this parameter does only affect rpc methods. To enable
1782       the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for ads, set ldap ssl
1783       = yes and ldap ssl ads = yes. See smb.conf(5) for more information on
1784       ldap ssl ads.
1785
1786       Default: ldap ssl = start tls
1787
1788       ldap ssl ads (G)
1789
1790           This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL
1791           when connecting to the ldap server using ads methods. Rpc methods
1792           are not affected by this parameter. Please note, that this
1793           parameter won´t have any effect if ldap ssl is set to no.
1794
1795           See smb.conf(5) for more information on ldap ssl.
1796
1797           Default: ldap ssl ads = no
1798
1799       ldap suffix (G)
1800
1801           Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the
1802           sambaDomain object.
1803
1804           The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the
1805           ldap user suffix, ldap group suffix, ldap machine suffix, and the
1806           ldap idmap suffix. Each of these should be given only a DN relative
1807           to the ldap suffix.
1808
1809           Default: ldap suffix =
1810
1811           Example: ldap suffix = dc=samba,dc=org
1812
1813       ldap timeout (G)
1814
1815           This parameter defines the number of seconds that Samba should use
1816           as timeout for LDAP operations.
1817
1818           Default: ldap timeout = 15
1819
1820       ldap user suffix (G)
1821
1822           This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree. If this
1823           parameter is unset, the value of ldap suffix will be used instead.
1824           The suffix string is pre-pended to the ldap suffix string so use a
1825           partial DN.
1826
1827           Default: ldap user suffix =
1828
1829           Example: ldap user suffix = ou=people
1830
1831       blocking locks (S)
1832
1833           This parameter controls the behavior of smbd(8) when given a
1834           request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an
1835           open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it.
1836
1837           If this parameter is set and the lock range requested cannot be
1838           immediately satisfied, samba will internally queue the lock
1839           request, and periodically attempt to obtain the lock until the
1840           timeout period expires.
1841
1842           If this parameter is set to no, then samba will behave as previous
1843           versions of Samba would and will fail the lock request immediately
1844           if the lock range cannot be obtained.
1845
1846           Default: blocking locks = yes
1847
1848       csc policy (S)
1849
1850           This stands for client-side caching policy, and specifies how
1851           clients capable of offline caching will cache the files in the
1852           share. The valid values are: manual, documents, programs, disable.
1853
1854           These values correspond to those used on Windows servers.
1855
1856           For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have offline
1857           caching disabled using csc policy = disable.
1858
1859           Default: csc policy = manual
1860
1861           Example: csc policy = programs
1862
1863       fake oplocks (S)
1864
1865           Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server
1866           to locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock
1867           (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume that it is
1868           the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively cache file
1869           data. With some oplock types the client may even cache file
1870           open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits.
1871
1872           When you set fake oplocks = yes, smbd(8) will always grant oplock
1873           requests no matter how many clients are using the file.
1874
1875           It is generally much better to use the real oplocks support rather
1876           than this parameter.
1877
1878           If you enable this option on all read-only shares or shares that
1879           you know will only be accessed from one client at a time such as
1880           physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see a big
1881           performance improvement on many operations. If you enable this
1882           option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the files
1883           read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use this
1884           option carefully!
1885
1886           Default: fake oplocks = no
1887
1888       kernel oplocks (S)
1889
1890           For UNIXes that support kernel based oplocks (currently only IRIX
1891           and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter allows the use of them to
1892           be turned on or off. However, this disables Level II oplocks for
1893           clients as the Linux and IRIX kernels do not support them properly.
1894
1895           Kernel oplocks support allows Samba oplocks to be broken whenever a
1896           local UNIX process or NFS operation accesses a file that smbd(8)
1897           has oplocked. This allows complete data consistency between
1898           SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a very cool feature
1899           :-).
1900
1901           If you do not need this interaction, you should disable the
1902           parameter on Linux and IRIX to get Level II oplocks and the
1903           associated performance benefit.
1904
1905           This parameter defaults to no and is translated to a no-op on
1906           systems that do not have the necessary kernel support.
1907
1908           Default: kernel oplocks = no
1909
1910       kernel share modes (S)
1911
1912           This parameter controls whether SMB share modes are translated into
1913           UNIX flocks.
1914
1915           Kernel share modes provide a minimal level of interoperability with
1916           local UNIX processes and NFS operations by preventing access with
1917           flocks corresponding to the SMB share modes. Generally, it is very
1918           desirable to leave this enabled.
1919
1920           Note that in order to use SMB2 durable file handles on a share, you
1921           have to turn kernel share modes off.
1922
1923           This parameter defaults to yes and is translated to a no-op on
1924           systems that do not have the necessary kernel flock support.
1925
1926           Default: kernel share modes = yes
1927
1928       level2 oplocks (S)
1929
1930           This parameter controls whether Samba supports level2 (read-only)
1931           oplocks on a share.
1932
1933           Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients that have an
1934           oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock to a
1935           read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead of
1936           releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional,
1937           exclusive oplocks). This allows all openers of the file that
1938           support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie.
1939           they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases
1940           performance for many accesses of files that are not commonly
1941           written (such as application .EXE files).
1942
1943           Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock writes to the
1944           file all clients are notified (no reply is needed or waited for)
1945           and told to break their oplocks to "none" and delete any read-ahead
1946           caches.
1947
1948           It is recommended that this parameter be turned on to speed access
1949           to shared executables.
1950
1951           For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.
1952
1953           Currently, if kernel oplocks are supported then level2 oplocks are
1954           not granted (even if this parameter is set to yes). Note also, the
1955           oplocks parameter must be set to yes on this share in order for
1956           this parameter to have any effect.
1957
1958           Default: level2 oplocks = yes
1959
1960       locking (S)
1961
1962           This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the
1963           server in response to lock requests from the client.
1964
1965           If locking = no, all lock and unlock requests will appear to
1966           succeed and all lock queries will report that the file in question
1967           is available for locking.
1968
1969           If locking = yes, real locking will be performed by the server.
1970
1971           This option may be useful for read-only filesystems which may not
1972           need locking (such as CDROM drives), although setting this
1973           parameter of no is not really recommended even in this case.
1974
1975           Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific
1976           service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. You
1977           should never need to set this parameter.
1978
1979           Default: locking = yes
1980
1981       lock spin time (G)
1982
1983           The time in milliseconds that smbd should keep waiting to see if a
1984           failed lock request can be granted. This parameter has changed in
1985           default value from Samba 3.0.23 from 10 to 200. The associated lock
1986           spin count parameter is no longer used in Samba 3.0.24. You should
1987           not need to change the value of this parameter.
1988
1989           Default: lock spin time = 200
1990
1991       oplock break wait time (G)
1992
1993           This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and
1994           WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client
1995           issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the
1996           network client can fail and not respond to the break request. This
1997           tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) is the amount of
1998           time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break request to such
1999           (broken) clients.
2000
2001               Warning
2002               DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND
2003               UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE.
2004           Default: oplock break wait time = 0
2005
2006       oplock contention limit (S)
2007
2008           This is a very advanced smbd(8) tuning option to improve the
2009           efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client
2010           contention for the same file.
2011
2012           In brief it specifies a number, which causes smbd(8)not to grant an
2013           oplock even when requested if the approximate number of clients
2014           contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this limit.
2015           This causes smbd to behave in a similar way to Windows NT.
2016
2017               Warning
2018               DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND
2019               UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE.
2020           Default: oplock contention limit = 2
2021
2022       oplocks (S)
2023
2024           This boolean option tells smbd whether to issue oplocks
2025           (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share. The
2026           oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve the
2027           speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients to
2028           aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this
2029           option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by
2030           default in Windows NT Servers).
2031
2032           Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a
2033           share. See the veto oplock files parameter. On some systems oplocks
2034           are recognized by the underlying operating system. This allows data
2035           synchronization between all access to oplocked files, whether it be
2036           via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the kernel oplocks
2037           parameter for details.
2038
2039           Default: oplocks = yes
2040
2041       posix locking (S)
2042
2043           The smbd(8) daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by
2044           SMB clients. The default behavior is to map this internal database
2045           to POSIX locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients
2046           are consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications
2047           accessing the files via a non-SMB method (e.g. NFS or local file
2048           access). It is very unlikely that you need to set this parameter to
2049           "no", unless you are sharing from an NFS mount, which is not a good
2050           idea in the first place.
2051
2052           Default: posix locking = yes
2053
2054       smb2 leases (G)
2055
2056           This boolean option tells smbd whether to globally negotiate SMB2
2057           leases on file open requests. Leasing is an SMB2-only feature which
2058           allows clients to aggressively cache files locally above and beyond
2059           the caching allowed by SMB1 oplocks. This (experimental) parameter
2060           is set to off by default until the SMB2 leasing code is declared
2061           fully stable.
2062
2063           This is only available with oplocks = yes and kernel oplocks = no.
2064
2065           Note that the write cache won´t be used for file handles with a
2066           smb2 write lease.
2067
2068           The Samba implementation of leases is currently marked as
2069           experimental!
2070
2071           Default: smb2 leases = no
2072
2073       strict locking (S)
2074
2075           This is an enumerated type that controls the handling of file
2076           locking in the server. When this is set to yes, the server will
2077           check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access
2078           if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems.
2079
2080           When strict locking is set to Auto (the default), the server
2081           performs file lock checks only on non-oplocked files. As most
2082           Windows redirectors perform file locking checks locally on oplocked
2083           files this is a good trade off for improved performance.
2084
2085           When strict locking is disabled, the server performs file lock
2086           checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.
2087
2088           Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is
2089           important. So in the vast majority of cases, strict locking = Auto
2090           or strict locking = no is acceptable.
2091
2092           Default: strict locking = Auto
2093
2094       debug class (G)
2095
2096           With this boolean parameter enabled, the debug class (DBGC_CLASS)
2097           will be displayed in the debug header.
2098
2099           For more information about currently available debug classes, see
2100           section about log level.
2101
2102           Default: debug class = no
2103
2104       debug hires timestamp (G)
2105
2106           Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a
2107           resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds
2108           microsecond resolution to the timestamp message header when turned
2109           on.
2110
2111           Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have
2112           an effect.
2113
2114           Default: debug hires timestamp = yes
2115
2116       debug pid (G)
2117
2118           When using only one log file for more then one forked
2119           smbd(8)-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs
2120           which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the
2121           timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on.
2122
2123           Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have
2124           an effect.
2125
2126           Default: debug pid = no
2127
2128       debug prefix timestamp (G)
2129
2130           With this option enabled, the timestamp message header is prefixed
2131           to the debug message without the filename and function information
2132           that is included with the debug timestamp parameter. This gives
2133           timestamps to the messages without adding an additional line.
2134
2135           Note that this parameter overrides the debug timestamp parameter.
2136
2137           Default: debug prefix timestamp = no
2138
2139       timestamp logs
2140
2141           This parameter is a synonym for debug timestamp.
2142
2143       debug timestamp (G)
2144
2145           Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are
2146           running at a high debug level these timestamps can be distracting.
2147           This boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned off.
2148
2149           Default: debug timestamp = yes
2150
2151       debug uid (G)
2152
2153           Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected
2154           user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid
2155           and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned
2156           on.
2157
2158           Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have
2159           an effect.
2160
2161           Default: debug uid = no
2162
2163       ldap debug level (G)
2164
2165           This parameter controls the debug level of the LDAP library calls.
2166           In the case of OpenLDAP, it is the same bit-field as understood by
2167           the server and documented in the slapd.conf(5) manpage. A typical
2168           useful value will be 1 for tracing function calls.
2169
2170           The debug output from the LDAP libraries appears with the prefix
2171           [LDAP] in Samba´s logging output. The level at which LDAP logging
2172           is printed is controlled by the parameter ldap debug threshold.
2173
2174           Default: ldap debug level = 0
2175
2176           Example: ldap debug level = 1
2177
2178       ldap debug threshold (G)
2179
2180           This parameter controls the Samba debug level at which the ldap
2181           library debug output is printed in the Samba logs. See the
2182           description of ldap debug level for details.
2183
2184           Default: ldap debug threshold = 10
2185
2186           Example: ldap debug threshold = 5
2187
2188       log file (G)
2189
2190           This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file
2191           (also known as the debug file).
2192
2193           This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
2194           separate log files for each user or machine.
2195
2196           No default
2197
2198           Example: log file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m
2199
2200       debuglevel
2201
2202           This parameter is a synonym for log level.
2203
2204       log level (G)
2205
2206           The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level
2207           (logging level) to be specified in the smb.conf file.
2208
2209           This parameter has been extended since the 2.2.x series, now it
2210           allows to specify the debug level for multiple debug classes. This
2211           is to give greater flexibility in the configuration of the system.
2212           The following debug classes are currently implemented:
2213
2214           ·   all
2215
2216           ·   tdb
2217
2218           ·   printdrivers
2219
2220           ·   lanman
2221
2222           ·   smb
2223
2224           ·   rpc_parse
2225
2226           ·   rpc_srv
2227
2228           ·   rpc_cli
2229
2230           ·   passdb
2231
2232           ·   sam
2233
2234           ·   auth
2235
2236           ·   winbind
2237
2238           ·   vfs
2239
2240           ·   idmap
2241
2242           ·   quota
2243
2244           ·   acls
2245
2246           ·   locking
2247
2248           ·   msdfs
2249
2250           ·   dmapi
2251
2252           ·   registry
2253
2254       Default: log level = 0
2255
2256       Example: log level = 3 passdb:5 auth:10 winbind:2
2257
2258       max log size (G)
2259
2260           This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the
2261           log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks the size and if
2262           it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding a .old extension.
2263
2264           A size of 0 means no limit.
2265
2266           Default: max log size = 5000
2267
2268           Example: max log size = 1000
2269
2270       syslog (G)
2271
2272           This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the
2273           system syslog logging levels. Samba debug level zero maps onto
2274           syslog LOG_ERR, debug level one maps onto LOG_WARNING, debug level
2275           two maps onto LOG_NOTICE, debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO. All
2276           higher levels are mapped to LOG_DEBUG.
2277
2278           This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog.
2279           Only messages with debug level less than this value will be sent to
2280           syslog. There still will be some logging to log.[sn]mbd even if
2281           syslog only is enabled.
2282
2283           Default: syslog = 1
2284
2285       syslog only (G)
2286
2287           If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into
2288           the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files. There still
2289           will be some logging to log.[sn]mbd even if syslog only is enabled.
2290
2291           Default: syslog only = no
2292
2293       abort shutdown script (G)
2294
2295           This a full path name to a script called by smbd(8) that should
2296           stop a shutdown procedure issued by the shutdown script.
2297
2298           If the connected user possesses the SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege,
2299           right, this command will be run as root.
2300
2301           Default: abort shutdown script = ""
2302
2303           Example: abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c
2304
2305       add group script (G)
2306
2307           This is the full pathname to a script that will be run AS ROOT by
2308           smbd(8) when a new group is requested. It will expand any %g to the
2309           group name passed. This script is only useful for installations
2310           using the Windows NT domain administration tools. The script is
2311           free to create a group with an arbitrary name to circumvent unix
2312           group name restrictions. In that case the script must print the
2313           numeric gid of the created group on stdout.
2314
2315           Default: add group script =
2316
2317           Example: add group script = /usr/sbin/groupadd %g
2318
2319       add machine script (G)
2320
2321           This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by smbd(8)
2322           when a machine is added to Samba´s domain and a Unix account
2323           matching the machine´s name appended with a "$" does not already
2324           exist.
2325
2326           This option is very similar to the add user script, and likewise
2327           uses the %u substitution for the account name. Do not use the %m
2328           substitution.
2329
2330           Default: add machine script =
2331
2332           Example: add machine script = /usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c
2333           Machine -d /var/lib/nobody -s /bin/false %u
2334
2335       add user script (G)
2336
2337           This is the full pathname to a script that will be run AS ROOT by
2338           smbd(8) under special circumstances described below.
2339
2340           Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are created for
2341           all users accessing files on this server. For sites that use
2342           Windows NT account databases as their primary user database
2343           creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the
2344           Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows smbd to
2345           create the required UNIX users ON DEMAND when a user accesses the
2346           Samba server.
2347
2348           When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at login
2349           (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, smbd(8) contacts the
2350           password server and attempts to authenticate the given user with
2351           the given password. If the authentication succeeds then smbd
2352           attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map
2353           the Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and add user script is
2354           set then smbd will call the specified script AS ROOT, expanding any
2355           %u argument to be the user name to create.
2356
2357           If this script successfully creates the user then smbd will
2358           continue on as though the UNIX user already existed. In this way,
2359           UNIX users are dynamically created to match existing Windows NT
2360           accounts.
2361
2362           See also security, password server, delete user script.
2363
2364           Default: add user script =
2365
2366           Example: add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u
2367
2368       add user to group script (G)
2369
2370           Full path to the script that will be called when a user is added to
2371           a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools. It will
2372           be run by smbd(8) AS ROOT. Any %g will be replaced with the group
2373           name and any %u will be replaced with the user name.
2374
2375           Note that the adduser command used in the example below does not
2376           support the used syntax on all systems.
2377
2378           Default: add user to group script =
2379
2380           Example: add user to group script = /usr/sbin/adduser %u %g
2381
2382       allow nt4 crypto (G)
2383
2384           This option controls whether the netlogon server (currently only in
2385           ´active directory domain controller´ mode), will reject clients
2386           which does not support NETLOGON_NEG_STRONG_KEYS nor
2387           NETLOGON_NEG_SUPPORTS_AES.
2388
2389           This option was added with Samba 4.2.0. It may lock out clients
2390           which worked fine with Samba versions up to 4.1.x. as the effective
2391           default was "yes" there, while it is "no" now.
2392
2393           If you have clients without RequireStrongKey = 1 in the registry,
2394           you may need to set "allow nt4 crypto = yes", until you have fixed
2395           all clients.
2396
2397           "allow nt4 crypto = yes" allows weak crypto to be negotiated, maybe
2398           via downgrade attacks.
2399
2400           This option yields precedence to the ´reject md5 clients´ option.
2401
2402           Default: allow nt4 crypto = no
2403
2404       delete group script (G)
2405
2406           This is the full pathname to a script that will be run AS ROOT
2407           smbd(8) when a group is requested to be deleted. It will expand any
2408           %g to the group name passed. This script is only useful for
2409           installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools.
2410
2411           Default: delete group script =
2412
2413       delete user from group script (G)
2414
2415           Full path to the script that will be called when a user is removed
2416           from a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools. It
2417           will be run by smbd(8) AS ROOT. Any %g will be replaced with the
2418           group name and any %u will be replaced with the user name.
2419
2420           Default: delete user from group script =
2421
2422           Example: delete user from group script = /usr/sbin/deluser %u %g
2423
2424       delete user script (G)
2425
2426           This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by smbd(8)
2427           when managing users with remote RPC (NT) tools.
2428
2429           This script is called when a remote client removes a user from the
2430           server, normally using ´User Manager for Domains´ or rpcclient.
2431
2432           This script should delete the given UNIX username.
2433
2434           Default: delete user script =
2435
2436           Example: delete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user %u
2437
2438       domain logons (G)
2439
2440           If set to yes, the Samba server will provide the netlogon service
2441           for Windows 9X network logons for the workgroup it is in. This will
2442           also cause the Samba server to act as a domain controller for NT4
2443           style domain services. For more details on setting up this feature
2444           see the Domain Control chapter of the Samba HOWTO Collection.
2445
2446           Default: domain logons = no
2447
2448       enable privileges (G)
2449
2450           This deprecated parameter controls whether or not smbd will honor
2451           privileges assigned to specific SIDs via either net rpc rights or
2452           one of the Windows user and group manager tools. This parameter is
2453           enabled by default. It can be disabled to prevent members of the
2454           Domain Admins group from being able to assign privileges to users
2455           or groups which can then result in certain smbd operations running
2456           as root that would normally run under the context of the connected
2457           user.
2458
2459           An example of how privileges can be used is to assign the right to
2460           join clients to a Samba controlled domain without providing root
2461           access to the server via smbd.
2462
2463           Please read the extended description provided in the Samba HOWTO
2464           documentation.
2465
2466           Default: enable privileges = yes
2467
2468       init logon delay (G)
2469
2470           This parameter specifies a delay in milliseconds for the hosts
2471           configured for delayed initial samlogon with init logon delayed
2472           hosts.
2473
2474           Default: init logon delay = 100
2475
2476       init logon delayed hosts (G)
2477
2478           This parameter takes a list of host names, addresses or networks
2479           for which the initial samlogon reply should be delayed (so other
2480           DCs get preferred by XP workstations if there are any).
2481
2482           The length of the delay can be specified with the init logon delay
2483           parameter.
2484
2485           Default: init logon delayed hosts =
2486
2487           Example: init logon delayed hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.de
2488
2489       logon drive (G)
2490
2491           This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory
2492           will be connected (see logon home) and is only used by NT
2493           Workstations.
2494
2495           Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon
2496           server.
2497
2498           Default: logon drive =
2499
2500           Example: logon drive = h:
2501
2502       logon home (G)
2503
2504           This parameter specifies the home directory location when a
2505           Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. It allows you to
2506           do
2507
2508
2509           C:\>NET USE H: /HOME
2510
2511           from a command prompt, for example.
2512
2513           This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
2514           separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
2515
2516           This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure that
2517           roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user´s home
2518           directory. This is done in the following way:
2519
2520
2521           logon home = \\%N\%U\profile
2522
2523           This tells Samba to return the above string, with substitutions
2524           made when a client requests the info, generally in a NetUserGetInfo
2525           request. Win9X clients truncate the info to \\server\share when a
2526           user does net use /home but use the whole string when dealing with
2527           profiles.
2528
2529           Note that in prior versions of Samba, the logon path was returned
2530           rather than logon home. This broke net use /home but allowed
2531           profiles outside the home directory. The current implementation is
2532           correct, and can be used for profiles if you use the above trick.
2533
2534           Disable this feature by setting logon home = "" - using the empty
2535           string.
2536
2537           This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server.
2538
2539           Default: logon home = \\%N\%U
2540
2541           Example: logon home = \\remote_smb_server\%U
2542
2543       logon path (G)
2544
2545           This parameter specifies the directory where roaming profiles
2546           (Desktop, NTuser.dat, etc) are stored. Contrary to previous
2547           versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X
2548           roaming profiles. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for
2549           Win 9X system, see the logon home parameter.
2550
2551           This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
2552           separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also specifies
2553           the directory from which the "Application Data", desktop, start
2554           menu, network neighborhood, programs and other folders, and their
2555           contents, are loaded and displayed on your Windows NT client.
2556
2557           The share and the path must be readable by the user for the
2558           preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT
2559           client. The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the
2560           first time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the
2561           NTuser.dat and other directories. Thereafter, the directories and
2562           any of the contents can, if required, be made read-only. It is not
2563           advisable that the NTuser.dat file be made read-only - rename it to
2564           NTuser.man to achieve the desired effect (a MANdatory profile).
2565
2566           Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to the [homes]
2567           share, even though there is no user logged in. Therefore, it is
2568           vital that the logon path does not include a reference to the homes
2569           share (i.e. setting this parameter to \\%N\homes\profile_path will
2570           cause problems).
2571
2572           This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
2573           separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
2574
2575               Warning
2576               Do not quote the value. Setting this as “\\%N\profile\%U” will
2577               break profile handling. Where the tdbsam or ldapsam passdb
2578               backend is used, at the time the user account is created the
2579               value configured for this parameter is written to the passdb
2580               backend and that value will over-ride the parameter value
2581               present in the smb.conf file. Any error present in the passdb
2582               backend account record must be editted using the appropriate
2583               tool (pdbedit on the command-line, or any other locally
2584               provided system tool).
2585           Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a domain
2586           controller.
2587
2588           Disable the use of roaming profiles by setting the value of this
2589           parameter to the empty string. For example, logon path = "". Take
2590           note that even if the default setting in the smb.conf file is the
2591           empty string, any value specified in the user account settings in
2592           the passdb backend will over-ride the effect of setting this
2593           parameter to null. Disabling of all roaming profile use requires
2594           that the user account settings must also be blank.
2595
2596           An example of use is:
2597
2598               logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U
2599
2600           Default: logon path = \\%N\%U\profile
2601
2602       logon script (G)
2603
2604           This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or NT command file
2605           (.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user
2606           successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS style CR/LF
2607           line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is
2608           recommended.
2609
2610           The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon] service. If
2611           the [netlogon] service specifies a path of
2612           /usr/local/samba/netlogon, and logon script = STARTUP.BAT, then the
2613           file that will be downloaded is:
2614
2615                    /usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT
2616
2617           The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice. A
2618           suggested command would be to add NET TIME \\SERVER /SET /YES, to
2619           force every machine to synchronize clocks with the same time
2620           server. Another use would be to add NET USE U: \\SERVER\UTILS for
2621           commonly used utilities, or
2622
2623               NET USE Q: \\SERVER\ISO9001_QA
2624
2625           for example.
2626
2627           Note that it is particularly important not to allow write access to
2628           the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission on the
2629           batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow the batch
2630           files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be breached.
2631
2632           This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have
2633           separate logon scripts for each user or machine.
2634
2635           This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server.
2636
2637           Default: logon script =
2638
2639           Example: logon script = scripts\%U.bat
2640
2641       reject md5 clients (G)
2642
2643           This option controls whether the netlogon server (currently only in
2644           ´active directory domain controller´ mode), will reject clients
2645           which does not support NETLOGON_NEG_SUPPORTS_AES.
2646
2647           You can set this to yes if all domain members support aes. This
2648           will prevent downgrade attacks.
2649
2650           This option takes precedence to the ´allow nt4 crypto´ option.
2651
2652           Default: reject md5 clients = no
2653
2654       set primary group script (G)
2655
2656           Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a primary
2657           group in addition to the auxiliary groups. This script sets the
2658           primary group in the unix user database when an administrator sets
2659           the primary group from the windows user manager or when fetching a
2660           SAM with net rpc vampire.  %u will be replaced with the user whose
2661           primary group is to be set.  %g will be replaced with the group to
2662           set.
2663
2664           Default: set primary group script =
2665
2666           Example: set primary group script = /usr/sbin/usermod -g ´%g´ ´%u´
2667
2668       shutdown script (G)
2669
2670           This a full path name to a script called by smbd(8) that should
2671           start a shutdown procedure.
2672
2673           If the connected user possesses the SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege,
2674           right, this command will be run as root.
2675
2676           The %z %t %r %f variables are expanded as follows:
2677
2678           ·   %z will be substituted with the shutdown message sent to the
2679               server.
2680
2681           ·   %t will be substituted with the number of seconds to wait
2682               before effectively starting the shutdown procedure.
2683
2684           ·   %r will be substituted with the switch -r. It means reboot
2685               after shutdown for NT.
2686
2687           ·   %f will be substituted with the switch -f. It means force the
2688               shutdown even if applications do not respond for NT.
2689
2690       Shutdown script example:
2691
2692           #!/bin/bash
2693
2694           time=$2
2695           let time="${time} / 60"
2696           let time="${time} + 1"
2697
2698           /sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 &
2699
2700
2701       Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background.
2702
2703       Default: shutdown script =
2704
2705       Example: shutdown script = /usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f
2706
2707       add share command (G)
2708
2709           Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete
2710           shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The add share command
2711           is used to define an external program or script which will add a
2712           new service definition to smb.conf.
2713
2714           In order to successfully execute the add share command, smbd
2715           requires that the administrator connects using a root account (i.e.
2716           uid == 0) or has the SeDiskOperatorPrivilege. Scripts defined in
2717           the add share command parameter are executed as root.
2718
2719           When executed, smbd will automatically invoke the add share command
2720           with five parameters.
2721
2722           ·   configFile - the location of the global smb.conf file.
2723
2724           ·   shareName - the name of the new share.
2725
2726           ·   pathName - path to an **existing** directory on disk.
2727
2728           ·   comment - comment string to associate with the new share.
2729
2730           ·   max connections Number of maximum simultaneous connections to
2731               this share.
2732
2733       This parameter is only used to add file shares. To add printer shares,
2734       see the addprinter command.
2735
2736       Default: add share command =
2737
2738       Example: add share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare
2739
2740       afs share (S)
2741
2742           This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled
2743           for this share. If enabled, it assumes that the directory exported
2744           via the path parameter is a local AFS import. The special AFS
2745           features include the attempt to hand-craft an AFS token if you
2746           enabled --with-fake-kaserver in configure.
2747
2748           Default: afs share = no
2749
2750       afs token lifetime (G)
2751
2752           This parameter controls the lifetime of tokens that the AFS
2753           fake-kaserver claims. In reality these never expire but this
2754           lifetime controls when the afs client will forget the token.
2755
2756           Set this parameter to 0 to get NEVERDATE.
2757
2758           Default: afs token lifetime = 604800
2759
2760       afs username map (G)
2761
2762           If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might want to
2763           hand-craft the usernames you are creating tokens for. For example
2764           this is necessary if you have users from several domain in your AFS
2765           Protection Database. One possible scheme to code users as
2766           DOMAIN+User as it is done by winbind with the + as a separator.
2767
2768           The mapped user name must contain the cell name to log into, so
2769           without setting this parameter there will be no token.
2770
2771           Default: afs username map =
2772
2773           Example: afs username map = %u@afs.samba.org
2774
2775       allow insecure wide links (G)
2776
2777           In normal operation the option wide links which allows the server
2778           to follow symlinks outside of a share path is automatically
2779           disabled when unix extensions are enabled on a Samba server. This
2780           is done for security purposes to prevent UNIX clients creating
2781           symlinks to areas of the server file system that the administrator
2782           does not wish to export.
2783
2784           Setting allow insecure wide links to true disables the link between
2785           these two parameters, removing this protection and allowing a site
2786           to configure the server to follow symlinks (by setting wide links
2787           to "true") even when unix extensions is turned on.
2788
2789           If is not recommended to enable this option unless you fully
2790           understand the implications of allowing the server to follow
2791           symbolic links created by UNIX clients. For most normal Samba
2792           configurations this would be considered a security hole and setting
2793           this parameter is not recommended.
2794
2795           This option was added at the request of sites who had deliberately
2796           set Samba up in this way and needed to continue supporting this
2797           functionality without having to patch the Samba code.
2798
2799           Default: allow insecure wide links = no
2800
2801       async smb echo handler (G)
2802
2803           This parameter specifies whether Samba should fork the async smb
2804           echo handler. It can be beneficial if your file system can block
2805           syscalls for a very long time. In some circumstances, it prolongs
2806           the timeout that Windows uses to determine whether a connection is
2807           dead.
2808
2809           Default: async smb echo handler = no
2810
2811       available (S)
2812
2813           This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If available = no,
2814           then ALL attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such
2815           failures are logged.
2816
2817           Default: available = yes
2818
2819       cache directory (G)
2820
2821           Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the lock directory.
2822           Since Samba 3.4.0, it is possible to differentiate between TDB
2823           files with persistent data and TDB files with non-persistent data
2824           using the state directory and the cache directory options.
2825
2826           This option specifies the directory where TDB files containing
2827           non-persistent data will be stored.
2828
2829           Default: cache directory = /var/lib/samba
2830
2831           Example: cache directory = /var/run/samba/locks/cache
2832
2833       change notify (S)
2834
2835           This parameter specifies whether Samba should reply to a client´s
2836           file change notify requests.
2837
2838           You should never need to change this parameter
2839
2840           Default: change notify = yes
2841
2842       change share command (G)
2843
2844           Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete
2845           shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The change share
2846           command is used to define an external program or script which will
2847           modify an existing service definition in smb.conf.
2848
2849           In order to successfully execute the change share command, smbd
2850           requires that the administrator connects using a root account (i.e.
2851           uid == 0) or has the SeDiskOperatorPrivilege. Scripts defined in
2852           the change share command parameter are executed as root.
2853
2854           When executed, smbd will automatically invoke the change share
2855           command with six parameters.
2856
2857           ·   configFile - the location of the global smb.conf file.
2858
2859           ·   shareName - the name of the new share.
2860
2861           ·   pathName - path to an **existing** directory on disk.
2862
2863           ·   comment - comment string to associate with the new share.
2864
2865           ·   max connections Number of maximum simultaneous connections to
2866               this share.
2867
2868           ·   CSC policy - client side caching policy in string form. Valid
2869               values are: manual, documents, programs, disable.
2870
2871       This parameter is only used to modify existing file share definitions.
2872       To modify printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen when
2873       browsing the Samba host.
2874
2875       Default: change share command =
2876
2877       Example: change share command = /usr/local/bin/changeshare
2878
2879       cluster addresses (G)
2880
2881           With this parameter you can add additional addresses nmbd will
2882           register with a WINS server. These addresses are not necessarily
2883           present on all nodes simultaneously, but they will be registered
2884           with the WINS server so that clients can contact any of the nodes.
2885
2886           Default: cluster addresses =
2887
2888           Example: cluster addresses = 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3
2889
2890       clustering (G)
2891
2892           This parameter specifies whether Samba should contact ctdb for
2893           accessing its tdb files and use ctdb as a backend for its messaging
2894           backend.
2895
2896           Set this parameter to yes only if you have a cluster setup with
2897           ctdb running.
2898
2899           Default: clustering = no
2900
2901       config file (G)
2902
2903           This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the
2904           default (usually smb.conf). There is a chicken and egg problem here
2905           as this option is set in the config file!
2906
2907           For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed when
2908           the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from the new
2909           config file.
2910
2911           This option takes the usual substitutions, which can be very
2912           useful.
2913
2914           If the config file doesn´t exist then it won´t be loaded (allowing
2915           you to special case the config files of just a few clients).
2916
2917           No default
2918
2919           Example: config file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m
2920
2921       copy (S)
2922
2923           This parameter allows you to "clone" service entries. The specified
2924           service is simply duplicated under the current service´s name. Any
2925           parameters specified in the current section will override those in
2926           the section being copied.
2927
2928           This feature lets you set up a ´template´ service and create
2929           similar services easily. Note that the service being copied must
2930           occur earlier in the configuration file than the service doing the
2931           copying.
2932
2933           Default: copy =
2934
2935           Example: copy = otherservice
2936
2937       ctdbd socket (G)
2938
2939           If you set clustering=yes, you need to tell Samba where ctdbd
2940           listens on its unix domain socket. The default path as of ctdb 1.0
2941           is /tmp/ctdb.socket which you have to explicitly set for Samba in
2942           smb.conf.
2943
2944           Default: ctdbd socket =
2945
2946           Example: ctdbd socket = /tmp/ctdb.socket
2947
2948       ctdb locktime warn threshold (G)
2949
2950           In a cluster environment using Samba and ctdb it is critical that
2951           locks on central ctdb-hosted databases like locking.tdb are not
2952           held for long. With the current Samba architecture it happens that
2953           Samba takes a lock and while holding that lock makes file system
2954           calls into the shared cluster file system. This option makes Samba
2955           warn if it detects that it has held locks for the specified number
2956           of milliseconds. If this happens, smbd will emit a debug level 0
2957           message into its logs and potentially into syslog. The most likely
2958           reason for such a log message is that an operation of the cluster
2959           file system Samba exports is taking longer than expected. The
2960           messages are meant as a debugging aid for potential cluster
2961           problems.
2962
2963           The default value of 0 disables this logging.
2964
2965           Default: ctdb locktime warn threshold = 0
2966
2967       ctdb timeout (G)
2968
2969           This parameter specifies a timeout in seconds for the connection
2970           between Samba and ctdb. It is only valid if you have compiled Samba
2971           with clustering and if you have set clustering=yes.
2972
2973           When something in the cluster blocks, it can happen that we wait
2974           indefinitely long for ctdb, just adding to the blocking condition.
2975           In a well-running cluster this should never happen, but there are
2976           too many components in a cluster that might have hickups. Choosing
2977           the right balance for this value is very tricky, because on a busy
2978           cluster long service times to transfer something across the cluster
2979           might be valid. Setting it too short will degrade the service your
2980           cluster presents, setting it too long might make the cluster itself
2981           not recover from something severely broken for too long.
2982
2983           Be aware that if you set this parameter, this needs to be in the
2984           file smb.conf, it is not really helpful to put this into a registry
2985           configuration (typical on a cluster), because to access the
2986           registry contact to ctdb is required.
2987
2988           Setting ctdb timeout to n makes any process waiting longer than n
2989           seconds for a reply by the cluster panic. Setting it to 0 (the
2990           default) makes Samba block forever, which is the highly recommended
2991           default.
2992
2993           Default: ctdb timeout = 0
2994
2995       default
2996
2997           This parameter is a synonym for default service.
2998
2999       default service (G)
3000
3001           This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be
3002           connected to if the service actually requested cannot be found.
3003           Note that the square brackets are NOT given in the parameter value
3004           (see example below).
3005
3006           There is no default value for this parameter. If this parameter is
3007           not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results
3008           in an error.
3009
3010           Typically the default service would be a guest ok, read-only
3011           service.
3012
3013           Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal
3014           that of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you
3015           to use macros like %S to make a wildcard service.
3016
3017           Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service used
3018           in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for
3019           interesting things.
3020
3021           Default: default service =
3022
3023           Example: default service = pub
3024
3025       delete readonly (S)
3026
3027           This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. This is not
3028           normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.
3029
3030           This option may be useful for running applications such as rcs,
3031           where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file permissions, and
3032           DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.
3033
3034           Default: delete readonly = no
3035
3036       delete share command (G)
3037
3038           Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete
3039           shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The delete share
3040           command is used to define an external program or script which will
3041           remove an existing service definition from smb.conf.
3042
3043           In order to successfully execute the delete share command, smbd
3044           requires that the administrator connects using a root account (i.e.
3045           uid == 0) or has the SeDiskOperatorPrivilege. Scripts defined in
3046           the delete share command parameter are executed as root.
3047
3048           When executed, smbd will automatically invoke the delete share
3049           command with two parameters.
3050
3051           ·   configFile - the location of the global smb.conf file.
3052
3053           ·   shareName - the name of the existing service.
3054
3055       This parameter is only used to remove file shares. To delete printer
3056       shares, see the deleteprinter command.
3057
3058       Default: delete share command =
3059
3060       Example: delete share command = /usr/local/bin/delshare
3061
3062       dfree cache time (S)
3063
3064           The dfree cache time should only be used on systems where a problem
3065           occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has been
3066           known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating
3067           systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry
3068           Ignore" at the end of each directory listing.
3069
3070           This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3.0.21. It
3071           specifies in seconds the time that smbd will cache the output of a
3072           disk free query. If set to zero (the default) no caching is done.
3073           This allows a heavily loaded server to prevent rapid spawning of
3074           dfree command scripts increasing the load.
3075
3076           By default this parameter is zero, meaning no caching will be done.
3077
3078           No default
3079
3080           Example: dfree cache time = 60
3081
3082       dfree command (S)
3083
3084           The dfree command setting should only be used on systems where a
3085           problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has
3086           been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other
3087           operating systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort
3088           Retry Ignore" at the end of each directory listing.
3089
3090           This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to
3091           calculate the total disk space and amount available with an
3092           external routine. The example below gives a possible script that
3093           might fulfill this function.
3094
3095           In Samba version 3.0.21 this parameter has been changed to be a
3096           per-share parameter, and in addition the parameter dfree cache time
3097           was added to allow the output of this script to be cached for
3098           systems under heavy load.
3099
3100           The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a
3101           directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically
3102           consist of the string ./. The script should return two integers in
3103           ASCII. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, and the
3104           second should be the number of available blocks. An optional third
3105           return value can give the block size in bytes. The default
3106           blocksize is 1024 bytes.
3107
3108           Note: Your script should NOT be setuid or setgid and should be
3109           owned by (and writeable only by) root!
3110
3111           Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:
3112
3113
3114               #!/bin/sh
3115               df $1 | tail -1 | awk ´{print $(NF-4),$(NF-2)}´
3116
3117           or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):
3118
3119
3120               #!/bin/sh
3121               /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk ´{print $3" "$5}´
3122
3123           Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path
3124           names on some systems.
3125
3126           By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity and
3127           remaining space will be used.
3128
3129           No default
3130
3131           Example: dfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree
3132
3133       directory name cache size (S)
3134
3135           This parameter specifies the size of the directory name cache. It
3136           will be needed to turn this off for *BSD systems.
3137
3138           Default: directory name cache size = 100
3139
3140       dmapi support (S)
3141
3142           This parameter specifies whether Samba should use DMAPI to
3143           determine whether a file is offline or not. This would typically be
3144           used in conjunction with a hierarchical storage system that
3145           automatically migrates files to tape.
3146
3147           Note that Samba infers the status of a file by examining the events
3148           that a DMAPI application has registered interest in. This heuristic
3149           is satisfactory for a number of hierarchical storage systems, but
3150           there may be system for which it will fail. In this case, Samba may
3151           erroneously report files to be offline.
3152
3153           This parameter is only available if a supported DMAPI
3154           implementation was found at compilation time. It will only be used
3155           if DMAPI is found to enabled on the system at run time.
3156
3157           Default: dmapi support = no
3158
3159       dont descend (S)
3160
3161           There are certain directories on some systems (e.g., the /proc tree
3162           under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are
3163           infinitely deep (recursive). This parameter allows you to specify a
3164           comma-delimited list of directories that the server should always
3165           show as empty.
3166
3167           Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format of the
3168           "dont descend" entries. For example you may need ./proc instead of
3169           just /proc. Experimentation is the best policy :-)
3170
3171           Default: dont descend =
3172
3173           Example: dont descend = /proc,/dev
3174
3175       dos filemode (S)
3176
3177           The default behavior in Samba is to provide UNIX-like behavior
3178           where only the owner of a file/directory is able to change the
3179           permissions on it. However, this behavior is often confusing to
3180           DOS/Windows users. Enabling this parameter allows a user who has
3181           write access to the file (by whatever means, including an ACL
3182           permission) to modify the permissions (including ACL) on it. Note
3183           that a user belonging to the group owning the file will not be
3184           allowed to change permissions if the group is only granted read
3185           access. Ownership of the file/directory may also be changed. Note
3186           that using the VFS modules acl_xattr or acl_tdb which store native
3187           Windows as meta-data will automatically turn this option on for any
3188           share for which they are loaded, as they require this option to
3189           emulate Windows ACLs correctly.
3190
3191           Default: dos filemode = no
3192
3193       dos filetime resolution (S)
3194
3195           Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on
3196           time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter for a share
3197           causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two
3198           second boundary when a query call that requires one second
3199           resolution is made to smbd(8).
3200
3201           This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++
3202           when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a share,
3203           Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a file
3204           has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a
3205           one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As
3206           the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file
3207           has a timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps
3208           will not match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has
3209           changed. Setting this option causes the two timestamps to match,
3210           and Visual C++ is happy.
3211
3212           Default: dos filetime resolution = no
3213
3214       dos filetimes (S)
3215
3216           Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can
3217           change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner
3218           of the file or root may change the timestamp. By default, Samba
3219           emulates the DOS semantics and allows to change the timestamp on a
3220           file if the user smbd is acting on behalf has write permissions.
3221           Due to changes in Microsoft Office 2000 and beyond, the default for
3222           this parameter has been changed from "no" to "yes" in Samba 3.0.14
3223           and above. Microsoft Excel will display dialog box warnings about
3224           the file being changed by another user if this parameter is not set
3225           to "yes" and files are being shared between users.
3226
3227           Default: dos filetimes = yes
3228
3229       fake directory create times (S)
3230
3231           NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files
3232           and directories. This is not the same as the ctime - status change
3233           time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default reports the earliest of
3234           the various times Unix does keep. Setting this parameter for a
3235           share causes Samba to always report midnight 1-1-1980 as the create
3236           time for directories.
3237
3238           This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++
3239           when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated makefiles have
3240           the object directory as a dependency for each object file, and a
3241           make rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE compares
3242           timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a directory.
3243           Thus the object directory will be created if it does not exist, but
3244           once it does exist it will always have an earlier timestamp than
3245           the object files it contains.
3246
3247           However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time reported by
3248           Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or deleted in the
3249           directory. NMAKE finds all object files in the object directory.
3250           The timestamp of the last one built is then compared to the
3251           timestamp of the object directory. If the directory´s timestamp if
3252           newer, then all object files will be rebuilt. Enabling this option
3253           ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE
3254           build will proceed as expected.
3255
3256           Default: fake directory create times = no
3257
3258       follow symlinks (S)
3259
3260           This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop smbd(8) from
3261           following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this
3262           parameter to no prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic
3263           link from being followed (the user will get an error). This option
3264           is very useful to stop users from adding a symbolic link to
3265           /etc/passwd in their home directory for instance. However it will
3266           slow filename lookups down slightly.
3267
3268           This option is enabled (i.e.  smbd will follow symbolic links) by
3269           default.
3270
3271           Default: follow symlinks = yes
3272
3273       fstype (S)
3274
3275           This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string
3276           that specifies the type of filesystem a share is using that is
3277           reported by smbd(8) when a client queries the filesystem type for a
3278           share. The default type is NTFS for compatibility with Windows NT
3279           but this can be changed to other strings such as Samba or FAT if
3280           required.
3281
3282           Default: fstype = NTFS
3283
3284           Example: fstype = Samba
3285
3286       homedir map (G)
3287
3288           If nis homedir is yes, and smbd(8) is also acting as a Win95/98
3289           logon server then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from
3290           which the server for the user´s home directory should be extracted.
3291           At present, only the Sun auto.home map format is understood. The
3292           form of the map is:
3293
3294               username server:/some/file/system
3295
3296           and the program will extract the servername from before the first
3297           ´:´. There should probably be a better parsing system that copes
3298           with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps.
3299
3300               Note
3301               A working NIS client is required on the system for this option
3302               to work.
3303           Default: homedir map =
3304
3305           Example: homedir map = amd.homedir
3306
3307       include (G)
3308
3309           This allows you to include one config file inside another. The file
3310           is included literally, as though typed in place.
3311
3312           It takes the standard substitutions, except %u, %P and %S.
3313
3314           The parameter include = registry has a special meaning: It does not
3315           include a file named registry from the current working directory,
3316           but instead reads the global configuration options from the
3317           registry. See the section on registry-based configuration for
3318           details. Note that this option automatically activates registry
3319           shares.
3320
3321           Default: include =
3322
3323           Example: include = /usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf
3324
3325       kernel change notify (S)
3326
3327           This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the kernel for
3328           change notifications in directories so that SMB clients can refresh
3329           whenever the data on the server changes.
3330
3331           This parameter is only used when your kernel supports change
3332           notification to user programs using the inotify interface.
3333
3334           Default: kernel change notify = yes
3335
3336       lock dir
3337
3338           This parameter is a synonym for lock directory.
3339
3340       lock directory (G)
3341
3342           This option specifies the directory where lock files will be
3343           placed. The lock files are used to implement the max connections
3344           option.
3345
3346           Note: This option can not be set inside registry configurations.
3347
3348           Default: lock directory = /var/lib/samba
3349
3350           Example: lock directory = /var/run/samba/locks
3351
3352       log writeable files on exit (G)
3353
3354           When the network connection between a CIFS client and Samba dies,
3355           Samba has no option but to simply shut down the server side of the
3356           network connection. If this happens, there is a risk of data
3357           corruption because the Windows client did not complete all write
3358           operations that the Windows application requested. Setting this
3359           option to "yes" makes smbd log with a level 0 message a list of all
3360           files that have been opened for writing when the network connection
3361           died. Those are the files that are potentially corrupted. It is
3362           meant as an aid for the administrator to give him a list of files
3363           to do consistency checks on.
3364
3365           Default: log writeable files on exit = no
3366
3367       magic output (S)
3368
3369           This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain
3370           output created by a magic script (see the magic script parameter
3371           below).
3372
3373               Warning
3374               If two clients use the same magic script in the same directory
3375               the output file content is undefined.
3376           Default: magic output =  # <magic script name>.out
3377
3378           Example: magic output = myfile.txt
3379
3380       magic script (S)
3381
3382           This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will
3383           be executed by the server when the file is closed. This allows a
3384           UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of
3385           the connected user.
3386
3387           Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion
3388           assuming that the user has the appropriate level of privilege and
3389           the file permissions allow the deletion.
3390
3391           If the script generates output, output will be sent to the file
3392           specified by the magic output parameter (see above).
3393
3394           Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing
3395           CR/LF instead of CR as the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must
3396           be executable as is on the host, which for some hosts and some
3397           shells will require filtering at the DOS end.
3398
3399           Magic scripts are EXPERIMENTAL and should NOT be relied upon.
3400
3401           Default: magic script =
3402
3403           Example: magic script = user.csh
3404
3405       message command (G)
3406
3407           This specifies what command to run when the server receives a
3408           WinPopup style message.
3409
3410           This would normally be a command that would deliver the message
3411           somehow. How this is to be done is up to your imagination.
3412
3413           An example is:
3414
3415               message command = csh -c ´xedit %s;rm %s´ &
3416
3417           This delivers the message using xedit, then removes it afterwards.
3418           NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN
3419           IMMEDIATELY. That´s why I have the ´&´ on the end. If it doesn´t
3420           return immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages
3421           (they should recover after 30 seconds, hopefully).
3422
3423           All messages are delivered as the global guest user. The command
3424           takes the standard substitutions, although
3425            %u won´t work (%U may be better in this case).
3426
3427           Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional ones apply.
3428           In particular:
3429
3430           ·   %s = the filename containing the message.
3431
3432           ·   %t = the destination that the message was sent to (probably the
3433               server name).
3434
3435           ·   %f = who the message is from.
3436
3437       You could make this command send mail, or whatever else takes your
3438       fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting ideas you have.
3439
3440       Here´s a way of sending the messages as mail to root:
3441
3442           message command = /bin/mail -s ´message from %f on %m´ root < %s; rm %s
3443
3444       If you don´t have a message command then the message won´t be delivered
3445       and Samba will tell the sender there was an error. Unfortunately WfWg
3446       totally ignores the error code and carries on regardless, saying that
3447       the message was delivered.
3448
3449       If you want to silently delete it then try:
3450
3451           message command = rm %s
3452
3453       Default: message command =
3454
3455       Example: message command = csh -c ´xedit %s; rm %s´ &
3456
3457       socket address
3458
3459           This parameter is a synonym for nbt client socket address.
3460
3461       nbt client socket address (G)
3462
3463           This option allows you to control what address Samba will send NBT
3464           client packets from, and process replies using, including in nmbd.
3465
3466           Setting this option should never be necessary on usual Samba
3467           servers running only one nmbd.
3468
3469           By default Samba will send UDP packets from the OS default address
3470           for the destination, and accept replies on 0.0.0.0.
3471
3472           This parameter is deprecated. See bind interfaces only = Yes and
3473           interfaces for the previous behaviour of controlling the normal
3474           listening sockets.
3475
3476           Default: nbt client socket address = 0.0.0.0
3477
3478           Example: nbt client socket address = 192.168.2.20
3479
3480       ncalrpc dir (G)
3481
3482           This directory will hold a series of named pipes to allow RPC over
3483           inter-process communication.
3484
3485           This will allow Samba and other unix processes to interact over
3486           DCE/RPC without using TCP/IP. Additionally a sub-directory ´np´ has
3487           restricted permissions, and allows a trusted communication channel
3488           between Samba processes
3489
3490           Default: ncalrpc dir = /var/run/samba/ncalrpc
3491
3492           Example: ncalrpc dir = /var/run/samba/ncalrpc
3493
3494       NIS homedir (G)
3495
3496           Get the home share server from a NIS map. For UNIX systems that use
3497           an automounter, the user´s home directory will often be mounted on
3498           a workstation on demand from a remote server.
3499
3500           When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory
3501           server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two
3502           network hops would be required to access the users home directory
3503           if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server
3504           for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can be
3505           very slow.
3506
3507           This option allows Samba to return the home share as being on a
3508           different server to the logon server and as long as a Samba daemon
3509           is running on the home directory server, it will be mounted on the
3510           Samba client directly from the directory server. When Samba is
3511           returning the home share to the client, it will consult the NIS map
3512           specified in homedir map and return the server listed there.
3513
3514           Note that for this option to work there must be a working NIS
3515           system and the Samba server with this option must also be a logon
3516           server.
3517
3518           Default: NIS homedir = no
3519
3520       nmbd bind explicit broadcast (G)
3521
3522           This option causes nmbd(8) to explicitly bind to the broadcast
3523           address of the local subnets. This is needed to make nmbd work
3524           correctly in combination with the socket address option. You should
3525           not need to unset this option.
3526
3527           Default: nmbd bind explicit broadcast = yes
3528
3529       panic action (G)
3530
3531           This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be
3532           called when either smbd(8) or nmbd(8) crashes. This is usually used
3533           to draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred.
3534
3535           Default: panic action =
3536
3537           Example: panic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"
3538
3539       perfcount module (G)
3540
3541           This parameter specifies the perfcount backend to be used when
3542           monitoring SMB operations. Only one perfcount module may be used,
3543           and it must implement all of the apis contained in the
3544           smb_perfcount_handler structure defined in smb.h.
3545
3546           No default
3547
3548       pid directory (G)
3549
3550           This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed.
3551
3552           Default: pid directory = /var/run
3553
3554           Example: pid directory = /var/run/
3555
3556       postexec (S)
3557
3558           This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is
3559           disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be
3560           run as the root on some systems.
3561
3562           An interesting example may be to unmount server resources:
3563
3564           postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom
3565
3566           Default: postexec =
3567
3568           Example: postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\"
3569           >> /tmp/log
3570
3571       exec
3572
3573           This parameter is a synonym for preexec.
3574
3575       preexec (S)
3576
3577           This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is
3578           connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.
3579
3580           An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every
3581           time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:
3582
3583
3584           preexec = csh -c ´echo \"Welcome to %S!\" |
3585           /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I´ &
3586
3587           Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)
3588
3589           See also preexec close and postexec.
3590
3591           Default: preexec =
3592
3593           Example: preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >>
3594           /tmp/log
3595
3596       preexec close (S)
3597
3598           This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from
3599           preexec should close the service being connected to.
3600
3601           Default: preexec close = no
3602
3603       auto services
3604
3605           This parameter is a synonym for preload.
3606
3607       preload (G)
3608
3609           This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added
3610           to the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers
3611           services that would otherwise not be visible.
3612
3613           Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file
3614           loaded then the load printers option is easier.
3615
3616           Default: preload =
3617
3618           Example: preload = fred lp colorlp
3619
3620       registry shares (G)
3621
3622           This turns on or off support for share definitions read from
3623           registry. Shares defined in smb.conf take precedence over shares
3624           with the same name defined in registry. See the section on
3625           registry-based configuration for details.
3626
3627           Note that this parameter defaults to no, but it is set to yes when
3628           config backend is set to registry.
3629
3630           Default: registry shares = no
3631
3632           Example: registry shares = yes
3633
3634       remote announce (G)
3635
3636           This option allows you to setup nmbd(8) to periodically announce
3637           itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name.
3638
3639           This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear in a remote
3640           workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don´t work.
3641           The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP packets
3642           to.
3643
3644           For example:
3645
3646               remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 192.168.4.255/STAFF
3647
3648           the above line would cause nmbd to announce itself to the two given
3649           IP addresses using the given workgroup names. If you leave out the
3650           workgroup name, then the one given in the workgroup parameter is
3651           used instead.
3652
3653           The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast
3654           addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses
3655           of known browse masters if your network config is that stable.
3656
3657           See the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba-HOWTO book.
3658
3659           Default: remote announce =
3660
3661       remote browse sync (G)
3662
3663           This option allows you to setup nmbd(8) to periodically request
3664           synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba
3665           server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to
3666           gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks.
3667           This is done in a manner that does not work with any non-Samba
3668           servers.
3669
3670           This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local clients
3671           to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse
3672           propagation rules don´t work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere
3673           that you can send IP packets to.
3674
3675           For example:
3676
3677               remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255
3678
3679           the above line would cause nmbd to request the master browser on
3680           the specified subnets or addresses to synchronize their browse
3681           lists with the local server.
3682
3683           The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast
3684           addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses
3685           of known browse masters if your network config is that stable. If a
3686           machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate that
3687           the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it is in
3688           fact the browse master on its segment.
3689
3690           The remote browse sync may be used on networks where there is no
3691           WINS server, and may be used on disjoint networks where each
3692           network has its own WINS server.
3693
3694           Default: remote browse sync =
3695
3696       reset on zero vc (G)
3697
3698           This boolean option controls whether an incoming session setup
3699           should kill other connections coming from the same IP. This matches
3700           the default Windows 2003 behaviour. Setting this parameter to yes
3701           becomes necessary when you have a flaky network and windows decides
3702           to reconnect while the old connection still has files with share
3703           modes open. These files become inaccessible over the new
3704           connection. The client sends a zero VC on the new connection, and
3705           Windows 2003 kills all other connections coming from the same IP.
3706           This way the locked files are accessible again. Please be aware
3707           that enabling this option will kill connections behind a
3708           masquerading router.
3709
3710           Default: reset on zero vc = no
3711
3712       root postexec (S)
3713
3714           This is the same as the postexec parameter except that the command
3715           is run as root. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as
3716           CDROMs) after a connection is closed.
3717
3718           Default: root postexec =
3719
3720       root preexec (S)
3721
3722           This is the same as the preexec parameter except that the command
3723           is run as root. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as
3724           CDROMs) when a connection is opened.
3725
3726           Default: root preexec =
3727
3728       root preexec close (S)
3729
3730           This is the same as the preexec close parameter except that the
3731           command is run as root.
3732
3733           Default: root preexec close = no
3734
3735       rpc_daemon:DAEMON (G)
3736
3737           Defines whether to use the embedded code or start a separate daemon
3738           for the defined rpc services. The rpc_daemon prefix must be
3739           followed by the server name, and a value.
3740
3741           Two possible values are currently supported:
3742
3743                         disabled
3744                         fork
3745
3746
3747           The classic method is to run rpc services as internal daemons
3748           embedded in smbd, therefore the external daemons are disabled by
3749           default.
3750
3751           Choosing the fork option will cause samba to fork a separate proces
3752           for each daemon configured this way. Each daemon may in turn fork a
3753           number of children used to handle requests from multiple smbds and
3754           direct tcp/ip connections (if the Endpoint Mapper is enabled).
3755           Communication with smbd happens over named pipes and require that
3756           said pipes are forward to the external daemon (see rpc_server).
3757
3758           Forked RPC Daemons support dynamically forking children to handle
3759           connections. The heuristics about how many children to keep around
3760           and how fast to allow them to fork and also how many clients each
3761           child is allowed to handle concurrently is defined by parametrical
3762           options named after the daemon. Five options are currently
3763           supported:
3764
3765                         prefork_min_children
3766                         prefork_max_children
3767                         prefork_spawn_rate
3768                         prefork_max_allowed_clients
3769                         prefork_child_min_life
3770
3771
3772           To set one of these options use the follwing syntax:
3773
3774                    damonname:prefork_min_children = 5
3775
3776
3777           Samba includes separate daemons for spoolss and the lsarpc/lsass,
3778           netlogon and samr pipes. Currently three daemons are available and
3779           they are called:
3780
3781                         epmd
3782                         lsasd
3783                         spoolssd
3784
3785
3786           Example:
3787
3788                    rpc_daemon:spoolssd = fork
3789
3790
3791           Default: rpc_daemon:DAEMON = disabled
3792
3793       rpc_server:SERVER (G)
3794
3795           With this option you can define if a rpc service should be running
3796           internal/embedded in smbd or should be redirected to an external
3797           daemon like Samba4, the endpoint mapper daemon, the spoolss daemon
3798           or the new LSA service daemon. The rpc_server prefix must be
3799           followed by the pipe name, and a value.
3800
3801           This option can be set for each available rpc service in Samba. The
3802           following list shows all available pipe names services you can
3803           modify with this option.
3804
3805           ·   epmapper - Endpoint Mapper
3806
3807           ·   winreg - Remote Registry Service
3808
3809           ·   srvsvc - Remote Server Services
3810
3811           ·   lsarpc - Local Security Authority
3812
3813           ·   samr - Security Account Management
3814
3815           ·   netlogon - Netlogon Remote Protocol
3816
3817           ·   netdfs - Settings for Distributed File System
3818
3819           ·   dssetup - Active Directory Setup
3820
3821           ·   wkssvc - Workstation Services
3822
3823           ·   spoolss - Network Printing Spooler
3824
3825           ·   svcctl - Service Control
3826
3827           ·   ntsvcs - Plug and Play Services
3828
3829           ·   eventlog - Event Logger
3830
3831           ·   initshutdown - Init Shutdown Service
3832
3833       Three possible values currently supported are: embedded external
3834       disabled
3835
3836       The classic method is to run every pipe as an internal function
3837       embedded in smbd. The defaults may vary depending on the service.
3838
3839       Choosing the external option allows to run a separate daemon or even a
3840       completely independent (3rd party) server capable of interfacing with
3841       samba via the MS-RPC interface over named pipes.
3842
3843       Currently in Samba3 we support three daemons, spoolssd, epmd and lsasd.
3844       These daemons can be enabled using the rpc_daemon option. For spoolssd
3845       you have to enable the daemon and proxy the named pipe with:
3846
3847       Examples:
3848
3849                          rpc_daemon:lsasd = fork
3850                          rpc_server:lsarpc = external
3851                          rpc_server:samr = external
3852                          rpc_server:netlogon = external
3853
3854                          rpc_server:spoolss = external
3855                          rpc_server:epmapper = disabled
3856
3857
3858       There is one special option which allows you to enable rpc services to
3859       listen for ncacn_ip_tcp connections too. Currently this is only used
3860       for testing and doesn´t scale!
3861
3862                          rpc_server:tcpip = yes
3863
3864
3865       Default: rpc_server:SERVER = embedded
3866
3867       state directory (G)
3868
3869           Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the lock directory.
3870           Since Samba 3.4.0, it is possible to differentiate between TDB
3871           files with persistent data and TDB files with non-persistent data
3872           using the state directory and the cache directory options.
3873
3874           This option specifies the directory where TDB files containing
3875           persistent data will be stored.
3876
3877           Default: state directory = /var/lib/samba
3878
3879           Example: state directory = /var/run/samba/locks/state
3880
3881       usershare allow guests (G)
3882
3883           This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed to
3884           be accessed by non-authenticated users or not. It is the equivalent
3885           of allowing people who can create a share the option of setting
3886           guest ok = yes in a share definition. Due to its security sensitive
3887           nature, the default is set to off.
3888
3889           Default: usershare allow guests = no
3890
3891       usershare max shares (G)
3892
3893           This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares that are
3894           allowed to be created by users belonging to the group owning the
3895           usershare directory. If set to zero (the default) user defined
3896           shares are ignored.
3897
3898           Default: usershare max shares = 0
3899
3900       usershare owner only (G)
3901
3902           This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by a user
3903           defined shares must be owned by the user creating the user defined
3904           share or not. If set to True (the default) then smbd checks that
3905           the directory path being shared is owned by the user who owns the
3906           usershare file defining this share and refuses to create the share
3907           if not. If set to False then no such check is performed and any
3908           directory path may be exported regardless of who owns it.
3909
3910           Default: usershare owner only = yes
3911
3912       usershare path (G)
3913
3914           This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the
3915           filesystem used to store the user defined share definition files.
3916           This directory must be owned by root, and have no access for other,
3917           and be writable only by the group owner. In addition the "sticky"
3918           bit must also be set, restricting rename and delete to owners of a
3919           file (in the same way the /tmp directory is usually configured).
3920           Members of the group owner of this directory are the users allowed
3921           to create usershares.
3922
3923           For example, a valid usershare directory might be
3924           /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares, set up as follows.
3925
3926
3927
3928                    ls -ld /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares/
3929                    drwxrwx--T  2 root power_users 4096 2006-05-05 12:27 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares/
3930
3931
3932           In this case, only members of the group "power_users" can create
3933           user defined shares.
3934
3935           Default: usershare path = /var/lib/samba/usershares
3936
3937       usershare prefix allow list (G)
3938
3939           This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of
3940           which are allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions.
3941           If the pathname to be exported doesn´t start with one of the
3942           strings in this list, the user defined share will not be allowed.
3943           This allows the Samba administrator to restrict the directories on
3944           the system that can be exported by user defined shares.
3945
3946           If there is a "usershare prefix deny list" and also a "usershare
3947           prefix allow list" the deny list is processed first, followed by
3948           the allow list, thus leading to the most restrictive
3949           interpretation.
3950
3951           Default: usershare prefix allow list =
3952
3953           Example: usershare prefix allow list = /home /data /space
3954
3955       usershare prefix deny list (G)
3956
3957           This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of
3958           which are NOT allowed to be exported by user defined share
3959           definitions. If the pathname exported starts with one of the
3960           strings in this list the user defined share will not be allowed.
3961           Any pathname not starting with one of these strings will be allowed
3962           to be exported as a usershare. This allows the Samba administrator
3963           to restrict the directories on the system that can be exported by
3964           user defined shares.
3965
3966           If there is a "usershare prefix deny list" and also a "usershare
3967           prefix allow list" the deny list is processed first, followed by
3968           the allow list, thus leading to the most restrictive
3969           interpretation.
3970
3971           Default: usershare prefix deny list =
3972
3973           Example: usershare prefix deny list = /etc /dev /private
3974
3975       usershare template share (G)
3976
3977           User defined shares only have limited possible parameters such as
3978           path, guest ok, etc. This parameter allows usershares to "cloned"
3979           from an existing share. If "usershare template share" is set to the
3980           name of an existing share, then all usershares created have their
3981           defaults set from the parameters set on this share.
3982
3983           The target share may be set to be invalid for real file sharing by
3984           setting the parameter "-valid = False" on the template share
3985           definition. This causes it not to be seen as a real exported share
3986           but to be able to be used as a template for usershares.
3987
3988           Default: usershare template share =
3989
3990           Example: usershare template share = template_share
3991
3992       utmp (G)
3993
3994           This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been
3995           configured and compiled with the option --with-utmp. If set to yes
3996           then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on
3997           the UNIX system) whenever a connection is made to a Samba server.
3998           Sites may use this to record the user connecting to a Samba share.
3999
4000           Due to the requirements of the utmp record, we are required to
4001           create a unique identifier for the incoming user. Enabling this
4002           option creates an n^2 algorithm to find this number. This may
4003           impede performance on large installations.
4004
4005           Default: utmp = no
4006
4007       utmp directory (G)
4008
4009           This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and
4010           compiled with the option --with-utmp. It specifies a directory
4011           pathname that is used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending
4012           on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server.
4013           By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever
4014           utmp file the native system is set to use (usually /var/run/utmp on
4015           Linux).
4016
4017           Default: utmp directory =  # Determined automatically
4018
4019           Example: utmp directory = /var/run/utmp
4020
4021       -valid (S)
4022
4023           This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be
4024           used. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no
4025           way visible nor accessible.
4026
4027           This option should not be used by regular users but might be of
4028           help to developers. Samba uses this option internally to mark
4029           shares as deleted.
4030
4031           Default: -valid = yes
4032
4033       volume (S)
4034
4035           This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share.
4036           Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a
4037           particular volume label.
4038
4039           Default: volume =  # the name of the share
4040
4041       wide links (S)
4042
4043           This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file
4044           system may be followed by the server. Links that point to areas
4045           within the directory tree exported by the server are always
4046           allowed; this parameter controls access only to areas that are
4047           outside the directory tree being exported.
4048
4049           Note: Turning this parameter on when UNIX extensions are enabled
4050           will allow UNIX clients to create symbolic links on the share that
4051           can point to files or directories outside restricted path exported
4052           by the share definition. This can cause access to areas outside of
4053           the share. Due to this problem, this parameter will be
4054           automatically disabled (with a message in the log file) if the unix
4055           extensions option is on.
4056
4057           See the parameter allow insecure wide links if you wish to change
4058           this coupling between the two parameters.
4059
4060           Default: wide links = no
4061
4062       wtmp directory (G)
4063
4064           This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and
4065           compiled with the option --with-utmp. It specifies a directory
4066           pathname that is used to store the wtmp or wtmpx files (depending
4067           on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server.
4068           The difference with the utmp directory is the fact that user info
4069           is kept after a user has logged out.
4070
4071           By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever
4072           utmp file the native system is set to use (usually /var/run/wtmp on
4073           Linux).
4074
4075           Default: wtmp directory =
4076
4077           Example: wtmp directory = /var/log/wtmp
4078
4079       addport command (G)
4080
4081           Samba 3.0.23 introduced support for adding printer ports remotely
4082           using the Windows "Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard". This option
4083           defines an external program to be executed when smbd receives a
4084           request to add a new Port to the system. The script is passed two
4085           parameters:
4086
4087           ·   port name
4088
4089           ·   device URI
4090
4091       The deviceURI is in the format of socket://<hostname>[:<portnumber>] or
4092       lpd://<hostname>/<queuename>.
4093
4094       Default: addport command =
4095
4096       Example: addport command = /etc/samba/scripts/addport.sh
4097
4098       addprinter command (G)
4099
4100           With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows
4101           NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add Printer Wizard (APW) icon
4102           is now also available in the "Printers..." folder displayed a share
4103           listing. The APW allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba
4104           or Windows NT/2000 print server.
4105
4106           For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically
4107           added to the underlying printing system. The addprinter command
4108           defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary
4109           operations for adding the printer to the print system and to add
4110           the appropriate service definition to the smb.conf file in order
4111           that it can be shared by smbd(8).
4112
4113           The addprinter command is automatically invoked with the following
4114           parameter (in order):
4115
4116           ·   printer name
4117
4118           ·   share name
4119
4120           ·   port name
4121
4122           ·   driver name
4123
4124           ·   location
4125
4126           ·   Windows 9x driver location
4127
4128       All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent by
4129       the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception. The "Windows 9x driver
4130       location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility only. The
4131       remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers to the APW
4132       questions.
4133
4134       Once the addprinter command has been executed, smbd will reparse the
4135       smb.conf to determine if the share defined by the APW exists. If the
4136       sharename is still invalid, then smbd will return an ACCESS_DENIED
4137       error to the client.
4138
4139       The addprinter command program can output a single line of text, which
4140       Samba will set as the port the new printer is connected to. If this
4141       line isn´t output, Samba won´t reload its printer shares.
4142
4143       Default: addprinter command =
4144
4145       Example: addprinter command = /usr/bin/addprinter
4146
4147       cups connection timeout (G)
4148
4149           This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to cups.
4150
4151           If set, this option specifies the number of seconds that smbd will
4152           wait whilst trying to contact to the CUPS server. The connection
4153           will fail if it takes longer than this number of seconds.
4154
4155           Default: cups connection timeout = 30
4156
4157           Example: cups connection timeout = 60
4158
4159       cups encrypt (G)
4160
4161           This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to cups and if
4162           you use CUPS newer than 1.0.x.It is used to define whether or not
4163           Samba should use encryption when talking to the CUPS server.
4164           Possible values are auto, yes and no
4165
4166           When set to auto we will try to do a TLS handshake on each CUPS
4167           connection setup. If that fails, we will fall back to unencrypted
4168           operation.
4169
4170           Default: cups encrypt = no
4171
4172       cups options (S)
4173
4174           This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to cups. Its
4175           value is a free form string of options passed directly to the cups
4176           library.
4177
4178           You can pass any generic print option known to CUPS (as listed in
4179           the CUPS "Software Users´ Manual"). You can also pass any printer
4180           specific option (as listed in "lpoptions -d printername -l") valid
4181           for the target queue. Multiple parameters should be space-delimited
4182           name/value pairs according to the PAPI text option ABNF
4183           specification. Collection values ("name={a=... b=... c=...}") are
4184           stored with the curley brackets intact.
4185
4186           You should set this parameter to raw if your CUPS server error_log
4187           file contains messages such as "Unsupported format
4188           ´application/octet-stream´" when printing from a Windows client
4189           through Samba. It is no longer necessary to enable system wide raw
4190           printing in /etc/cups/mime.{convs,types}.
4191
4192           Default: cups options = ""
4193
4194           Example: cups options = "raw media=a4"
4195
4196       cups server (G)
4197
4198           This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to cups.
4199
4200           If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS
4201           client.conf. This is necessary if you have virtual samba servers
4202           that connect to different CUPS daemons.
4203
4204           Optionally, a port can be specified by separating the server name
4205           and port number with a colon. If no port was specified, the default
4206           port for IPP (631) will be used.
4207
4208           Default: cups server = ""
4209
4210           Example: cups server = mycupsserver
4211
4212           Example: cups server = mycupsserver:1631
4213
4214       default devmode (S)
4215
4216           This parameter is only applicable to printable services. When smbd
4217           is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each
4218           printer on the Samba server has a Device Mode which defines things
4219           such as paper size and orientation and duplex settings. The device
4220           mode can only correctly be generated by the printer driver itself
4221           (which can only be executed on a Win32 platform). Because smbd is
4222           unable to execute the driver code to generate the device mode, the
4223           default behavior is to set this field to NULL.
4224
4225           Most problems with serving printer drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP
4226           clients can be traced to a problem with the generated device mode.
4227           Certain drivers will do things such as crashing the client´s
4228           Explorer.exe with a NULL devmode. However, other printer drivers
4229           can cause the client´s spooler service (spoolsv.exe) to die if the
4230           devmode was not created by the driver itself (i.e. smbd generates a
4231           default devmode).
4232
4233           This parameter should be used with care and tested with the printer
4234           driver in question. It is better to leave the device mode to NULL
4235           and let the Windows client set the correct values. Because drivers
4236           do not do this all the time, setting default devmode = yes will
4237           instruct smbd to generate a default one.
4238
4239           For more information on Windows NT/2k printing and Device Modes,
4240           see the MSDN documentation.
4241
4242           Default: default devmode = yes
4243
4244       deleteprinter command (G)
4245
4246           With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer support for Windows
4247           NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now possible to delete a
4248           printer at run time by issuing the DeletePrinter() RPC call.
4249
4250           For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically
4251           deleted from the underlying printing system. The deleteprinter
4252           command defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary
4253           operations for removing the printer from the print system and from
4254           smb.conf.
4255
4256           The deleteprinter command is automatically called with only one
4257           parameter: printer name.
4258
4259           Once the deleteprinter command has been executed, smbd will reparse
4260           the smb.conf to check that the associated printer no longer exists.
4261           If the sharename is still valid, then smbd will return an
4262           ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.
4263
4264           Default: deleteprinter command =
4265
4266           Example: deleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter
4267
4268       disable spoolss (G)
4269
4270           Enabling this parameter will disable Samba´s support for the
4271           SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC´s and will yield identical behavior as Samba
4272           2.0.x. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using Lanman style
4273           printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be unaffected by the
4274           parameter. However, this will also disable the ability to upload
4275           printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer
4276           Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window. It will
4277           also disable the capability of Windows NT/2000 clients to download
4278           print drivers from the Samba host upon demand.  Be very careful
4279           about enabling this parameter.
4280
4281           Default: disable spoolss = no
4282
4283       enable spoolss (G)
4284
4285           Inverted synonym for disable spoolss.
4286
4287           Default: enable spoolss = yes
4288
4289       enumports command (G)
4290
4291           The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign to UNIX hosts. Under
4292           Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port is associated with a port
4293           monitor and generally takes the form of a local port (i.e. LPT1:,
4294           COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port (i.e. LPD Port Monitor, etc...). By
4295           default, Samba has only one port defined--"Samba Printer Port".
4296           Under Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name. If
4297           you wish to have a list of ports displayed (smbd does not use a
4298           port name for anything) other than the default "Samba Printer
4299           Port", you can define enumports command to point to a program which
4300           should generate a list of ports, one per line, to standard output.
4301           This listing will then be used in response to the level 1 and 2
4302           EnumPorts() RPC.
4303
4304           Default: enumports command =
4305
4306           Example: enumports command = /usr/bin/listports
4307
4308       force printername (S)
4309
4310           When printing from Windows NT (or later), each printer in smb.conf
4311           has two associated names which can be used by the client. The first
4312           is the sharename (or shortname) defined in smb.conf. This is the
4313           only printername available for use by Windows 9x clients. The
4314           second name associated with a printer can be seen when browsing to
4315           the "Printers" (or "Printers and Faxes") folder on the Samba
4316           server. This is referred to simply as the printername (not to be
4317           confused with the printer name option).
4318
4319           When assigning a new driver to a printer on a remote Windows
4320           compatible print server such as Samba, the Windows client will
4321           rename the printer to match the driver name just uploaded. This can
4322           result in confusion for users when multiple printers are bound to
4323           the same driver. To prevent Samba from allowing the printer´s
4324           printername to differ from the sharename defined in smb.conf, set
4325           force printername = yes.
4326
4327           Be aware that enabling this parameter may affect migrating printers
4328           from a Windows server to Samba since Windows has no way to force
4329           the sharename and printername to match.
4330
4331           It is recommended that this parameter´s value not be changed once
4332           the printer is in use by clients as this could cause a user not be
4333           able to delete printer connections from their local Printers
4334           folder.
4335
4336           Default: force printername = no
4337
4338       iprint server (G)
4339
4340           This parameter is only applicable if printing is set to iprint.
4341
4342           If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS
4343           client.conf. This is necessary if you have virtual samba servers
4344           that connect to different CUPS daemons.
4345
4346           Default: iprint server = ""
4347
4348           Example: iprint server = MYCUPSSERVER
4349
4350       load printers (G)
4351
4352           A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the
4353           printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. See the printers
4354           section for more details.
4355
4356           Default: load printers = yes
4357
4358       lppause command (S)
4359
4360           This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server
4361           host in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job.
4362
4363           This command should be a program or script which takes a printer
4364           name and job number to pause the print job. One way of implementing
4365           this is by using job priorities, where jobs having a too low
4366           priority won´t be sent to the printer.
4367
4368           If a %p is given then the printer name is put in its place. A %j is
4369           replaced with the job number (an integer). On HPUX (see
4370           printing=hpux ), if the -p%p option is added to the lpq command,
4371           the job will show up with the correct status, i.e. if the job
4372           priority is lower than the set fence priority it will have the
4373           PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it will
4374           have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.
4375
4376           Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
4377           lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
4378
4379           Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the
4380           value of the printing parameter is SYSV, in which case the default
4381           is : lp -i %p-%j -H hold or if the value of the printing parameter
4382           is SOFTQ, then the default is: qstat -s -j%j -h.
4383
4384           Default: lppause command =  # determined by printing parameter
4385
4386           Example: lppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0
4387
4388       lpq cache time (G)
4389
4390           This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the
4391           lpq command being called too often. A separate cache is kept for
4392           each variation of the lpq command used by the system, so if you use
4393           different lpq commands for different users then they won´t share
4394           cache information.
4395
4396           The cache files are stored in /tmp/lpq.xxxx where xxxx is a hash of
4397           the lpq command in use.
4398
4399           The default is 30 seconds, meaning that the cached results of a
4400           previous identical lpq command will be used if the cached data is
4401           less than 30 seconds old. A large value may be advisable if your
4402           lpq command is very slow.
4403
4404           A value of 0 will disable caching completely.
4405
4406           Default: lpq cache time = 30
4407
4408           Example: lpq cache time = 10
4409
4410       lpq command (S)
4411
4412           This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server
4413           host in order to obtain lpq-style printer status information.
4414
4415           This command should be a program or script which takes a printer
4416           name as its only parameter and outputs printer status information.
4417
4418           Currently nine styles of printer status information are supported;
4419           BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX, CUPS, and SOFTQ. This covers
4420           most UNIX systems. You control which type is expected using the
4421           printing = option.
4422
4423           Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not correctly
4424           send the connection number for the printer they are requesting
4425           status information about. To get around this, the server reports on
4426           the first printer service connected to by the client. This only
4427           happens if the connection number sent is invalid.
4428
4429           If a %p is given then the printer name is put in its place.
4430           Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
4431
4432           Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
4433           lpq command as the $PATH may not be available to the server. When
4434           compiled with the CUPS libraries, no lpq command is needed because
4435           smbd will make a library call to obtain the print queue listing.
4436
4437           Default: lpq command =  # determined by printing parameter
4438
4439           Example: lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p
4440
4441       lpresume command (S)
4442
4443           This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server
4444           host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a
4445           specific print job.
4446
4447           This command should be a program or script which takes a printer
4448           name and job number to resume the print job. See also the lppause
4449           command parameter.
4450
4451           If a %p is given then the printer name is put in its place. A %j is
4452           replaced with the job number (an integer).
4453
4454           Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
4455           lpresume command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
4456
4457           See also the printing parameter.
4458
4459           Default: Currently no default value is given to this string, unless
4460           the value of the printing parameter is SYSV, in which case the
4461           default is:
4462
4463           lp -i %p-%j -H resume
4464
4465           or if the value of the printing parameter is SOFTQ, then the
4466           default is:
4467
4468           qstat -s -j%j -r
4469
4470           Default: lpresume command =  # determined by printing parameter
4471
4472           Example: lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2
4473
4474       lprm command (S)
4475
4476           This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server
4477           host in order to delete a print job.
4478
4479           This command should be a program or script which takes a printer
4480           name and job number, and deletes the print job.
4481
4482           If a %p is given then the printer name is put in its place. A %j is
4483           replaced with the job number (an integer).
4484
4485           Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
4486           lprm command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
4487
4488           Examples of use are:
4489
4490               lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j
4491
4492               or
4493
4494               lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j
4495
4496           Default: lprm command =  # determined by printing parameter
4497
4498       max print jobs (S)
4499
4500           This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a
4501           Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is
4502           exceeded, smbd(8) will remote "Out of Space" to the client.
4503
4504           Default: max print jobs = 1000
4505
4506           Example: max print jobs = 5000
4507
4508       max reported print jobs (S)
4509
4510           This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs displayed in a
4511           port monitor for Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this
4512           number is exceeded, the excess jobs will not be shown. A value of
4513           zero means there is no limit on the number of print jobs reported.
4514
4515           Default: max reported print jobs = 0
4516
4517           Example: max reported print jobs = 1000
4518
4519       os2 driver map (G)
4520
4521           The parameter is used to define the absolute path to a file
4522           containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2
4523           printer driver names. The format is:
4524
4525           <nt driver name> = <os2 driver name>.<device name>
4526
4527           For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 printer driver
4528           would appear as HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP LaserJet 5L.
4529
4530           The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace
4531           problem described in the chapter on Classical Printing in the
4532           Samba3-HOWTO book. For more details on OS/2 clients, please refer
4533           to chapter on other clients in the Samba3-HOWTO book.
4534
4535           Default: os2 driver map =
4536
4537       print ok
4538
4539           This parameter is a synonym for printable.
4540
4541       printable (S)
4542
4543           If this parameter is yes, then clients may open, write to and
4544           submit spool files on the directory specified for the service.
4545
4546           Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the
4547           service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print
4548           data. The read only parameter controls only non-printing access to
4549           the resource.
4550
4551           Default: printable = no
4552
4553       printcap cache time (G)
4554
4555           This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing
4556           subsystem is again asked for the known printers.
4557
4558           Setting this parameter to 0 disables any rescanning for new or
4559           removed printers after the initial startup.
4560
4561           Default: printcap cache time = 750
4562
4563           Example: printcap cache time = 600
4564
4565       printcap
4566
4567           This parameter is a synonym for printcap name.
4568
4569       printcap name (G)
4570
4571           This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default
4572           printcap name used by the server (usually /etc/printcap). See the
4573           discussion of the [printers] section above for reasons why you
4574           might want to do this.
4575
4576           To use the CUPS printing interface set printcap name = cups. This
4577           should be supplemented by an additional setting printing = cups in
4578           the [global] section.  printcap name = cups will use the "dummy"
4579           printcap created by CUPS, as specified in your CUPS configuration
4580           file.
4581
4582           On System V systems that use lpstat to list available printers you
4583           can use printcap name = lpstat to automatically obtain lists of
4584           available printers. This is the default for systems that define
4585           SYSV at configure time in Samba (this includes most System V based
4586           systems). If
4587            printcap name is set to lpstat on these systems then Samba will
4588           launch lpstat -v and attempt to parse the output to obtain a
4589           printer list.
4590
4591           A minimal printcap file would look something like this:
4592
4593               print1|My Printer 1
4594               print2|My Printer 2
4595               print3|My Printer 3
4596               print4|My Printer 4
4597               print5|My Printer 5
4598
4599           where the ´|´ separates aliases of a printer. The fact that the
4600           second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it´s a
4601           comment.
4602
4603               Note
4604               Under AIX the default printcap name is /etc/qconfig. Samba will
4605               assume the file is in AIX qconfig format if the string qconfig
4606               appears in the printcap filename.
4607           Default: printcap name = /etc/printcap
4608
4609           Example: printcap name = /etc/myprintcap
4610
4611       print command (S)
4612
4613           After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command
4614           will be used via a system() call to process the spool file.
4615           Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the
4616           host´s printing subsystem, but there is no requirement that this be
4617           the case. The server will not remove the spool file, so whatever
4618           command you specify should remove the spool file when it has been
4619           processed, otherwise you will need to manually remove old spool
4620           files.
4621
4622           The print command is simply a text string. It will be used verbatim
4623           after macro substitutions have been made:
4624
4625           %s, %f - the path to the spool file name
4626
4627           %p - the appropriate printer name
4628
4629           %J - the job name as transmitted by the client.
4630
4631           %c - The number of printed pages of the spooled job (if known).
4632
4633           %z - the size of the spooled print job (in bytes)
4634
4635           The print command MUST contain at least one occurrence of %s or %f
4636           - the %p is optional. At the time a job is submitted, if no printer
4637           name is supplied the %p will be silently removed from the printer
4638           command.
4639
4640           If specified in the [global] section, the print command given will
4641           be used for any printable service that does not have its own print
4642           command specified.
4643
4644           If there is neither a specified print command for a printable
4645           service nor a global print command, spool files will be created but
4646           not processed and (most importantly) not removed.
4647
4648           Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the nobody account.
4649           If this happens then create an alternative guest account that can
4650           print and set the guest account in the [global] section.
4651
4652           You can form quite complex print commands by realizing that they
4653           are just passed to a shell. For example the following will log a
4654           print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that ´;´ is the
4655           usual separator for command in shell scripts.
4656
4657           print command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s;
4658           rm %s
4659
4660           You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you
4661           normally print files on your system. The default for the parameter
4662           varies depending on the setting of the printing parameter.
4663
4664           Default: For printing = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG or PLP :
4665
4666           print command = lpr -r -P%p %s
4667
4668           For printing = SYSV or HPUX :
4669
4670           print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s
4671
4672           For printing = SOFTQ :
4673
4674           print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s
4675
4676           For printing = CUPS : If SAMBA is compiled against libcups, then
4677           printcap = cups uses the CUPS API to submit jobs, etc. Otherwise it
4678           maps to the System V commands with the -oraw option for printing,
4679           i.e. it uses lp -c -d%p -oraw; rm %s. With printing = cups, and if
4680           SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually set print command
4681           will be ignored.
4682
4683           No default
4684
4685           Example: print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s
4686
4687       printer
4688
4689           This parameter is a synonym for printer name.
4690
4691       printer name (S)
4692
4693           This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print
4694           jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.
4695
4696           If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will
4697           be used for any printable service that does not have its own
4698           printer name specified.
4699
4700           The default value of the printer name may be lp on many systems.
4701
4702           Default: printer name =
4703
4704           Example: printer name = laserwriter
4705
4706       printing (S)
4707
4708           This parameters controls how printer status information is
4709           interpreted on your system. It also affects the default values for
4710           the print command, lpq command, lppause command , lpresume command,
4711           and lprm command if specified in the [global] section.
4712
4713           Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are BSD, AIX,
4714           LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX, SOFTQ, CUPS and IPRINT.
4715
4716           Be aware that CUPS and IPRINT are only available if the CUPS
4717           development library was available at the time Samba was compiled or
4718           packaged.
4719
4720           To see what the defaults are for the other print commands when
4721           using the various options use the testparm(1) program.
4722
4723           This option can be set on a per printer basis. Please be aware
4724           however, that you must place any of the various printing commands
4725           (e.g. print command, lpq command, etc...) after defining the value
4726           for the printing option since it will reset the printing commands
4727           to default values.
4728
4729           See also the discussion in the [printers] section.
4730
4731           See testparm -v.  for the default value on your system
4732
4733           Default: printing =  # Depends on the operating system
4734
4735       printjob username (S)
4736
4737           This parameter specifies which user information will be passed to
4738           the printing system. Usually, the username is sent, but in some
4739           cases, e.g. the domain prefix is useful, too.
4740
4741           Default: printjob username = %U
4742
4743           Example: printjob username = %D\%U
4744
4745       print notify backchannel (S)
4746
4747           Windows print clients can update print queue status by expecting
4748           the server to open a backchannel SMB connection to them. Due to
4749           client firewall settings this can cause considerable timeouts and
4750           will often fail, as there is no guarantee the client is even
4751           running an SMB server. By default, the Samba print server will not
4752           try to connect back to clients, and will treat corresponding
4753           requests as if the connection back to the client failed.
4754
4755           Default: print notify backchannel = no
4756
4757       queuepause command (S)
4758
4759           This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server
4760           host in order to pause the printer queue.
4761
4762           This command should be a program or script which takes a printer
4763           name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, such that
4764           no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.
4765
4766           This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be
4767           issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT.
4768
4769           If a %p is given then the printer name is put in its place.
4770           Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
4771
4772           Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
4773           command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
4774
4775           Default: queuepause command =  # determined by printing parameter
4776
4777           Example: queuepause command = disable %p
4778
4779       queueresume command (S)
4780
4781           This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server
4782           host in order to resume the printer queue. It is the command to
4783           undo the behavior that is caused by the previous parameter
4784           (queuepause command).
4785
4786           This command should be a program or script which takes a printer
4787           name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, such that
4788           queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.
4789
4790           This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be
4791           issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT.
4792
4793           If a %p is given then the printer name is put in its place.
4794           Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
4795
4796           Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
4797           command as the PATH may not be available to the server.
4798
4799           Default: queueresume command =  # determined by printing parameter
4800
4801           Example: queueresume command = enable %p
4802
4803       show add printer wizard (G)
4804
4805           With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows
4806           NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will appear on
4807           Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will contain
4808           an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW). However, it is
4809           possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of
4810           privilege of the connected user.
4811
4812           Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will open a
4813           handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for
4814           Administrator privileges. If the user does not have administrative
4815           access on the print server (i.e is not root or has granted the
4816           SePrintOperatorPrivilege), the OpenPrinterEx() call fails and the
4817           client makes another open call with a request for a lower privilege
4818           level. This should succeed, however the APW icon will not be
4819           displayed.
4820
4821           Disabling the show add printer wizard parameter will always cause
4822           the OpenPrinterEx() on the server to fail. Thus the APW icon will
4823           never be displayed.
4824
4825               Note
4826               This does not prevent the same user from having administrative
4827               privilege on an individual printer.
4828           Default: show add printer wizard = yes
4829
4830       spoolss: architecture (G)
4831
4832           Windows spoolss print clients only allow association of server-side
4833           drivers with printers when the driver architecture matches the
4834           advertised print server architecture. Samba´s spoolss print server
4835           architecture can be changed using this parameter.
4836
4837           Default: spoolss: architecture = Windows NT x86
4838
4839           Example: spoolss: architecture = Windows x64
4840
4841       spoolss: os_major (G)
4842
4843           Windows might require a new os version number. This option allows
4844           to modify the build number. The complete default version number is:
4845           5.0.2195 (Windows 2000). The example is 6.1.7601 (Windows 2008 R2).
4846
4847           Default: spoolss: os_major = 5
4848
4849           Example: spoolss: os_major = 6
4850
4851       spoolss: os_minor (G)
4852
4853           Windows might require a new os version number. This option allows
4854           to modify the build number. The complete default version number is:
4855           5.0.2195 (Windows 2000). The example is 6.1.7601 (Windows 2008 R2).
4856
4857           Default: spoolss: os_minor = 0
4858
4859           Example: spoolss: os_minor = 1
4860
4861       spoolss: os_build (G)
4862
4863           Windows might require a new os version number. This option allows
4864           to modify the build number. The complete default version number is:
4865           5.0.2195 (Windows 2000). The example is 6.1.7601 (Windows 2008 R2).
4866
4867           Default: spoolss: os_build = 2195
4868
4869           Example: spoolss: os_build = 7601
4870
4871       use client driver (S)
4872
4873           This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 clients. It has no
4874           effect on Windows 95/98/ME clients. When serving a printer to
4875           Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing a valid printer
4876           driver on the Samba host, the client will be required to install a
4877           local printer driver. From this point on, the client will treat the
4878           print as a local printer and not a network printer connection. This
4879           is much the same behavior that will occur when disable spoolss =
4880           yes.
4881
4882           The differentiating factor is that under normal circumstances, the
4883           NT/2000 client will attempt to open the network printer using
4884           MS-RPC. The problem is that because the client considers the
4885           printer to be local, it will attempt to issue the OpenPrinterEx()
4886           call requesting access rights associated with the logged on user.
4887           If the user possesses local administrator rights but not root
4888           privilege on the Samba host (often the case), the OpenPrinterEx()
4889           call will fail. The result is that the client will now display an
4890           "Access Denied; Unable to connect" message in the printer queue
4891           window (even though jobs may successfully be printed).
4892
4893           If this parameter is enabled for a printer, then any attempt to
4894           open the printer with the PRINTER_ACCESS_ADMINISTER right is mapped
4895           to PRINTER_ACCESS_USE instead. Thus allowing the OpenPrinterEx()
4896           call to succeed.  This parameter MUST not be enabled on a print
4897           share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba server.
4898
4899           Default: use client driver = no
4900
4901       acl allow execute always (S)
4902
4903           This boolean parameter controls the behaviour of smbd(8) when
4904           receiving a protocol request of "open for execution" from a Windows
4905           client. With Samba 3.6 and older, the execution right in the ACL
4906           was not checked, so a client could execute a file even if it did
4907           not have execute rights on the file. In Samba 4.0, this has been
4908           fixed, so that by default, i.e. when this parameter is set to
4909           "False", "open for execution" is now denied when execution
4910           permissions are not present.
4911
4912           If this parameter is set to "True", Samba does not check execute
4913           permissions on "open for execution", thus re-establishing the
4914           behaviour of Samba 3.6. This can be useful to smoothen upgrades
4915           from older Samba versions to 4.0 and newer. This setting is not
4916           meant to be used as a permanent setting, but as a temporary relief:
4917           It is recommended to fix the permissions in the ACLs and reset this
4918           parameter to the default after a certain transition period.
4919
4920           Default: acl allow execute always = no
4921
4922       acl check permissions (S)
4923
4924           Please note this parameter is now deprecated in Samba 3.6.2 and
4925           will be removed in a future version of Samba.
4926
4927           This boolean parameter controls what smbd(8) does on receiving a
4928           protocol request of "open for delete" from a Windows client. If a
4929           Windows client doesn´t have permissions to delete a file then they
4930           expect this to be denied at open time. POSIX systems normally only
4931           detect restrictions on delete by actually attempting to delete the
4932           file or directory. As Windows clients can (and do) "back out" a
4933           delete request by unsetting the "delete on close" bit Samba cannot
4934           delete the file immediately on "open for delete" request as we
4935           cannot restore such a deleted file. With this parameter set to true
4936           (the default) then smbd checks the file system permissions directly
4937           on "open for delete" and denies the request without actually
4938           deleting the file if the file system permissions would seem to deny
4939           it. This is not perfect, as it´s possible a user could have deleted
4940           a file without Samba being able to check the permissions correctly,
4941           but it is close enough to Windows semantics for mostly correct
4942           behaviour. Samba will correctly check POSIX ACL semantics in this
4943           case.
4944
4945           If this parameter is set to "false" Samba doesn´t check permissions
4946           on "open for delete" and allows the open. If the user doesn´t have
4947           permission to delete the file this will only be discovered at close
4948           time, which is too late for the Windows user tools to display an
4949           error message to the user. The symptom of this is files that appear
4950           to have been deleted "magically" re-appearing on a Windows explorer
4951           refresh. This is an extremely advanced protocol option which should
4952           not need to be changed. This parameter was introduced in its final
4953           form in 3.0.21, an earlier version with slightly different
4954           semantics was introduced in 3.0.20. That older version is not
4955           documented here.
4956
4957           Default: acl check permissions = yes
4958
4959       acl map full control (S)
4960
4961           This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8) maps a POSIX ACE
4962           entry of "rwx" (read/write/execute), the maximum allowed POSIX
4963           permission set, into a Windows ACL of "FULL CONTROL". If this
4964           parameter is set to true any POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" will be
4965           returned in a Windows ACL as "FULL CONTROL", is this parameter is
4966           set to false any POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" will be returned as the
4967           specific Windows ACL bits representing read, write and execute.
4968
4969           Default: acl map full control = yes
4970
4971       cldap port (G)
4972
4973           This option controls the port used by the CLDAP protocol.
4974
4975           Default: cldap port = 389
4976
4977           Example: cldap port = 3389
4978
4979       client ipc max protocol (G)
4980
4981           The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level
4982           that will be supported for IPC$ connections as DCERPC transport.
4983
4984           Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation
4985           phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate
4986           protocol.
4987
4988           The value default refers to the latest supported protocol,
4989           currently SMB3_11.
4990
4991           See client max protocol for a full list of available protocols. The
4992           values CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2 are silently upgraded to
4993           NT1.
4994
4995           Default: client ipc max protocol = default
4996
4997           Example: client ipc max protocol = SMB2_10
4998
4999       client ipc min protocol (G)
5000
5001           This setting controls the minimum protocol version that the will be
5002           attempted to use for IPC$ connections as DCERPC transport.
5003
5004           Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation
5005           phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate
5006           protocol.
5007
5008           The value default refers to the higher value of NT1 and the
5009           effective value of client min protocol.
5010
5011           See client max protocol for a full list of available protocols. The
5012           values CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2 are silently upgraded to
5013           NT1.
5014
5015           Default: client ipc min protocol = default
5016
5017           Example: client ipc min protocol = SMB3_11
5018
5019       client max protocol (G)
5020
5021           The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level
5022           that will be supported by the client.
5023
5024           Possible values are :
5025
5026           ·   CORE: Earliest version. No concept of user names.
5027
5028           ·   COREPLUS: Slight improvements on CORE for efficiency.
5029
5030           ·   LANMAN1: First modern version of the protocol. Long filename
5031               support.
5032
5033           ·   LANMAN2: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.
5034
5035           ·   NT1: Current up to date version of the protocol. Used by
5036               Windows NT. Known as CIFS.
5037
5038           ·   SMB2: Re-implementation of the SMB protocol. Used by Windows
5039               Vista and later versions of Windows. SMB2 has sub protocols
5040               available.
5041
5042               ·   SMB2_02: The earliest SMB2 version.
5043
5044               ·   SMB2_10: Windows 7 SMB2 version.
5045
5046               ·   SMB2_22: Early Windows 8 SMB2 version.
5047
5048               ·   SMB2_24: Windows 8 beta SMB2 version.
5049
5050           By default SMB2 selects the SMB2_10 variant.
5051
5052       ·   SMB3: The same as SMB2. Used by Windows 8. SMB3 has sub protocols
5053           available.
5054
5055           ·   SMB3_00: Windows 8 SMB3 version. (mostly the same as SMB2_24)
5056
5057           ·   SMB3_02: Windows 8.1 SMB3 version.
5058
5059       By default SMB3 selects the SMB3_00 variant.
5060
5061       Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation
5062       phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate
5063       protocol.
5064
5065       The value default refers to NT1.
5066
5067       IPC$ connections for DCERPC e.g. in winbindd, are handled by the client
5068       ipc max protocol option.
5069
5070       Default: client max protocol = default
5071
5072       Example: client max protocol = LANMAN1
5073
5074       client min protocol (G)
5075
5076           This setting controls the minimum protocol version that the client
5077           will attempt to use.
5078
5079           Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation
5080           phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate
5081           protocol.
5082
5083           See Related command: client max protocol for a full list of
5084           available protocols.
5085
5086           IPC$ connections for DCERPC e.g. in winbindd, are handled by the
5087           client ipc min protocol option.
5088
5089           Default: client min protocol = CORE
5090
5091           Example: client min protocol = NT1
5092
5093       client use spnego (G)
5094
5095           This variable controls whether Samba clients will try to use Simple
5096           and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with supporting
5097           servers (including WindowsXP, Windows2000 and Samba 3.0) to agree
5098           upon an authentication mechanism. This enables Kerberos
5099           authentication in particular.
5100
5101           When client NTLMv2 auth is also set to yes extended security
5102           (SPNEGO) is required in order to use NTLMv2 only within NTLMSSP.
5103           This behavior was introduced with the patches for CVE-2016-2111.
5104
5105           Default: client use spnego = yes
5106
5107       dcerpc endpoint servers (G)
5108
5109           Specifies which DCE/RPC endpoint servers should be run.
5110
5111           Default: dcerpc endpoint servers = epmapper, wkssvc, rpcecho, samr,
5112           netlogon, lsarpc, spoolss, drsuapi, dssetup, unixinfo, browser,
5113           eventlog6, backupkey, dnsserver
5114
5115           Example: dcerpc endpoint servers = rpcecho
5116
5117       defer sharing violations (G)
5118
5119           Windows allows specifying how a file will be shared with other
5120           processes when it is opened. Sharing violations occur when a file
5121           is opened by a different process using options that violate the
5122           share settings specified by other processes. This parameter causes
5123           smbd to act as a Windows server does, and defer returning a
5124           "sharing violation" error message for up to one second, allowing
5125           the client to close the file causing the violation in the meantime.
5126
5127           UNIX by default does not have this behaviour.
5128
5129           There should be no reason to turn off this parameter, as it is
5130           designed to enable Samba to more correctly emulate Windows.
5131
5132           Default: defer sharing violations = yes
5133
5134       dgram port (G)
5135
5136           Specifies which ports the server should listen on for NetBIOS
5137           datagram traffic.
5138
5139           Default: dgram port = 138
5140
5141       disable netbios (G)
5142
5143           Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba.
5144           Netbios is the only available form of browsing in all windows
5145           versions except for 2000 and XP.
5146
5147               Note
5148               Clients that only support netbios won´t be able to see your
5149               samba server when netbios support is disabled.
5150           Default: disable netbios = no
5151
5152       durable handles (S)
5153
5154           This boolean parameter controls whether Samba can grant SMB2
5155           durable file handles on a share.
5156
5157           Note that durable handles are only enabled if kernel oplocks = no,
5158           kernel share modes = no, and posix locking = no, i.e. if the share
5159           is configured for CIFS/SMB2 only access, not supporting
5160           interoperability features with local UNIX processes or NFS
5161           operations.
5162
5163           Also note that, for the time being, durability is not granted for a
5164           handle that has the delete on close flag set.
5165
5166           Default: durable handles = yes
5167
5168       ea support (S)
5169
5170           This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8) will allow clients
5171           to attempt to store OS/2 style Extended attributes on a share. In
5172           order to enable this parameter the underlying filesystem exported
5173           by the share must support extended attributes (such as provided on
5174           XFS and EXT3 on Linux, with the correct kernel patches). On Linux
5175           the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount option
5176           user_xattr in order for extended attributes to work, also extended
5177           attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel.
5178
5179           Default: ea support = no
5180
5181       enable asu support (G)
5182
5183           Hosts running the "Advanced Server for Unix (ASU)" product require
5184           some special accomodations such as creating a builtin [ADMIN$]
5185           share that only supports IPC connections. The has been the default
5186           behavior in smbd for many years. However, certain Microsoft
5187           applications such as the Print Migrator tool require that the
5188           remote server support an [ADMIN$] file share. Disabling this
5189           parameter allows for creating an [ADMIN$] file share in smb.conf.
5190
5191           Default: enable asu support = no
5192
5193       eventlog list (G)
5194
5195           This option defines a list of log names that Samba will report to
5196           the Microsoft EventViewer utility. The listed eventlogs will be
5197           associated with tdb file on disk in the $(statedir)/eventlog.
5198
5199           The administrator must use an external process to parse the normal
5200           Unix logs such as /var/log/messages and write then entries to the
5201           eventlog tdb files. Refer to the eventlogadm(8) utility for how to
5202           write eventlog entries.
5203
5204           Default: eventlog list =
5205
5206           Example: eventlog list = Security Application Syslog Apache
5207
5208       large readwrite (G)
5209
5210           This parameter determines whether or not smbd(8) supports the new
5211           64k streaming read and write variant SMB requests introduced with
5212           Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs
5213           this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating
5214           system such as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2.4 kernel. Can improve
5215           performance by 10% with Windows 2000 clients. Defaults to on. Not
5216           as tested as some other Samba code paths.
5217
5218           Default: large readwrite = yes
5219
5220       map acl inherit (S)
5221
5222           This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8) will attempt to map
5223           the ´inherit´ and ´protected´ access control entry flags stored in
5224           Windows ACLs into an extended attribute called user.SAMBA_PAI. This
5225           parameter only takes effect if Samba is being run on a platform
5226           that supports extended attributes (Linux and IRIX so far) and
5227           allows the Windows 2000 ACL editor to correctly use inheritance
5228           with the Samba POSIX ACL mapping code.
5229
5230           Default: map acl inherit = no
5231
5232       max mux (G)
5233
5234           This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous
5235           SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow. You
5236           should never need to set this parameter.
5237
5238           Default: max mux = 50
5239
5240       max ttl (G)
5241
5242           This option tells nmbd(8) what the default ´time to live´ of
5243           NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when nmbd is requesting a name
5244           using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should
5245           never need to change this parameter. The default is 3 days.
5246
5247           Default: max ttl = 259200
5248
5249       max wins ttl (G)
5250
5251           This option tells smbd(8) when acting as a WINS server (wins
5252           support = yes) what the maximum ´time to live´ of NetBIOS names
5253           that nmbd will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to
5254           change this parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).
5255
5256           Default: max wins ttl = 518400
5257
5258       max xmit (G)
5259
5260           This option controls the maximum packet size that will be
5261           negotiated by Samba. The default is 16644, which matches the
5262           behavior of Windows 2000. A value below 2048 is likely to cause
5263           problems. You should never need to change this parameter from its
5264           default value.
5265
5266           Default: max xmit = 16644
5267
5268           Example: max xmit = 8192
5269
5270       min receivefile size (G)
5271
5272           This option changes the behavior of smbd(8) when processing
5273           SMBwriteX calls. Any incoming SMBwriteX call on a non-signed
5274           SMB/CIFS connection greater than this value will not be processed
5275           in the normal way but will be passed to any underlying kernel
5276           recvfile or splice system call (if there is no such call Samba will
5277           emulate in user space). This allows zero-copy writes directly from
5278           network socket buffers into the filesystem buffer cache, if
5279           available. It may improve performance but user testing is
5280           recommended. If set to zero Samba processes SMBwriteX calls in the
5281           normal way. To enable POSIX large write support (SMB/CIFS writes up
5282           to 16Mb) this option must be nonzero. The maximum value is 128k.
5283           Values greater than 128k will be silently set to 128k.
5284
5285           Note this option will have NO EFFECT if set on a SMB signed
5286           connection.
5287
5288           The default is zero, which disables this option.
5289
5290           Default: min receivefile size = 0
5291
5292       min wins ttl (G)
5293
5294           This option tells nmbd(8) when acting as a WINS server (wins
5295           support = yes) what the minimum ´time to live´ of NetBIOS names
5296           that nmbd will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to
5297           change this parameter. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds).
5298
5299           Default: min wins ttl = 21600
5300
5301       name resolve order (G)
5302
5303           This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine
5304           what naming services to use and in what order to resolve host names
5305           to IP addresses. Its main purpose to is to control how netbios name
5306           resolution is performed. The option takes a space separated string
5307           of name resolution options.
5308
5309           The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They cause
5310           names to be resolved as follows:
5311
5312           ·    lmhosts : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If
5313               the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS
5314               name (see the manpage for lmhosts for details) then any name
5315               type matches for lookup.
5316
5317           ·    host : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using
5318               the system /etc/hosts, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name
5319               resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or
5320               Solaris this may be controlled by the /etc/nsswitch.conf file.
5321               Note that this method is used only if the NetBIOS name type
5322               being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type or 0x1c (domain
5323               controllers). The latter case is only useful for active
5324               directory domains and results in a DNS query for the SRV RR
5325               entry matching _ldap._tcp.domain.
5326
5327           ·   wins : Query a name with the IP address listed in the
5328               WINSSERVER parameter. If no WINS server has been specified this
5329               method will be ignored.
5330
5331           ·   bcast : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces
5332               listed in the interfaces parameter. This is the least reliable
5333               of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host
5334               being on a locally connected subnet.
5335
5336       The example below will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined
5337       first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal system
5338       hostname lookup.
5339
5340       When Samba is functioning in ADS security mode (security = ads) it is
5341       advised to use following settings for name resolve order:
5342
5343       name resolve order = wins bcast
5344
5345       DC lookups will still be done via DNS, but fallbacks to netbios names
5346       will not inundate your DNS servers with needless querys for
5347       DOMAIN<0x1c> lookups.
5348
5349       Default: name resolve order = lmhosts wins host bcast
5350
5351       Example: name resolve order = lmhosts bcast host
5352
5353       nbt port (G)
5354
5355           Specifies which port the server should use for NetBIOS over IP name
5356           services traffic.
5357
5358           Default: nbt port = 137
5359
5360       nt acl support (S)
5361
5362           This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8) will attempt to map
5363           UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. The UNIX
5364           permissions considered are the traditional UNIX owner and group
5365           permissions, as well as POSIX ACLs set on any files or directories.
5366           This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases prior to
5367           2.2.2.
5368
5369           Default: nt acl support = yes
5370
5371       nt pipe support (G)
5372
5373           This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8) will allow Windows
5374           NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific IPC$ pipes. This is a
5375           developer debugging option and can be left alone.
5376
5377           Default: nt pipe support = yes
5378
5379       nt status support (G)
5380
5381           This boolean parameter controls whether smbd(8) will negotiate NT
5382           specific status support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients. This is a
5383           developer debugging option and should be left alone. If this option
5384           is set to no then Samba offers exactly the same DOS error codes
5385           that versions prior to Samba 2.2.3 reported.
5386
5387           You should not need to ever disable this parameter.
5388
5389           Default: nt status support = yes
5390
5391       profile acls (S)
5392
5393           This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people
5394           have been having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from
5395           Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients. New versions of Windows 2000 or
5396           Windows XP service packs do security ACL checking on the owner and
5397           ability to write of the profile directory stored on a local
5398           workstation when copied from a Samba share.
5399
5400           When not in domain mode with winbindd then the security info copied
5401           onto the local workstation has no meaning to the logged in user
5402           (SID) on that workstation so the profile storing fails. Adding this
5403           parameter onto a share used for profile storage changes two things
5404           about the returned Windows ACL. Firstly it changes the owner and
5405           group owner of all reported files and directories to be
5406           BUILTIN\\Administrators, BUILTIN\\Users respectively (SIDs
5407           S-1-5-32-544, S-1-5-32-545). Secondly it adds an ACE entry of "Full
5408           Control" to the SID BUILTIN\\Users to every returned ACL. This will
5409           allow any Windows 2000 or XP workstation user to access the
5410           profile.
5411
5412           Note that if you have multiple users logging on to a workstation
5413           then in order to prevent them from being able to access each others
5414           profiles you must remove the "Bypass traverse checking" advanced
5415           user right. This will prevent access to other users profile
5416           directories as the top level profile directory (named after the
5417           user) is created by the workstation profile code and has an ACL
5418           restricting entry to the directory tree to the owning user.
5419
5420           Note that this parameter should be set to yes on dedicated profile
5421           shares only. On other shares, it might cause incorrect file
5422           ownerships.
5423
5424           Default: profile acls = no
5425
5426       read raw (G)
5427
5428           This is ignored if async echo handler is set, because this feature
5429           is incompatible with raw read SMB requests
5430
5431           If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet.
5432           This typically provides a major performance benefit for some very,
5433           very old clients.
5434
5435           However, some clients either negotiate the allowable block size
5436           incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block sizes, and
5437           for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.
5438
5439           In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool
5440           and left severely alone.
5441
5442           Default: read raw = yes
5443
5444       rpc big endian (G)
5445
5446           Setting this option will force the RPC client and server to
5447           transfer data in big endian.
5448
5449           If it is disabled, data will be transferred in little endian.
5450
5451           The behaviour is independent of the endianness of the host machine.
5452
5453           Default: rpc big endian = no
5454
5455       max protocol
5456
5457           This parameter is a synonym for server max protocol.
5458
5459       protocol
5460
5461           This parameter is a synonym for server max protocol.
5462
5463       server max protocol (G)
5464
5465           The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level
5466           that will be supported by the server.
5467
5468           Possible values are :
5469
5470           ·   LANMAN1: First modern version of the protocol. Long filename
5471               support.
5472
5473           ·   LANMAN2: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.
5474
5475           ·   NT1: Current up to date version of the protocol. Used by
5476               Windows NT. Known as CIFS.
5477
5478           ·   SMB2: Re-implementation of the SMB protocol. Used by Windows
5479               Vista and later versions of Windows. SMB2 has sub protocols
5480               available.
5481
5482               ·   SMB2_02: The earliest SMB2 version.
5483
5484               ·   SMB2_10: Windows 7 SMB2 version.
5485
5486               ·   SMB2_22: Early Windows 8 SMB2 version.
5487
5488               ·   SMB2_24: Windows 8 beta SMB2 version.
5489
5490           By default SMB2 selects the SMB2_10 variant.
5491
5492       ·   SMB3: The same as SMB2. Used by Windows 8. SMB3 has sub protocols
5493           available.
5494
5495           ·   SMB3_00: Windows 8 SMB3 version. (mostly the same as SMB2_24)
5496
5497       By default SMB3 selects the SMB3_00 variant.
5498
5499       Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation
5500       phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate
5501       protocol.
5502
5503       Default: server max protocol = SMB3
5504
5505       Example: server max protocol = LANMAN1
5506
5507       min protocol
5508
5509           This parameter is a synonym for server min protocol.
5510
5511       server min protocol (G)
5512
5513           This setting controls the minimum protocol version that the server
5514           will allow the client to use.
5515
5516           Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation
5517           phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate
5518           protocol.
5519
5520           See Related command: server max protocol for a full list of
5521           available protocols.
5522
5523           Default: server min protocol = LANMAN1
5524
5525           Example: server min protocol = NT1
5526
5527       share:fake_fscaps (G)
5528
5529           This is needed to support some special application that makes
5530           QFSINFO calls to check whether we set the SPARSE_FILES bit (0x40).
5531           If this bit is not set that particular application refuses to work
5532           against Samba. With share:fake_fscaps = 64 the SPARSE_FILES file
5533           system capability flag is set. Use other decimal values to specify
5534           the bitmask you need to fake.
5535
5536           Default: share:fake_fscaps = 0
5537
5538       smb2 max credits (G)
5539
5540           This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous
5541           SMB2 operations that Samba tells the client it will allow. This is
5542           similar to the max mux parameter for SMB1. You should never need to
5543           set this parameter.
5544
5545           The default is 8192 credits, which is the same as a Windows 2008R2
5546           SMB2 server.
5547
5548           Default: smb2 max credits = 8192
5549
5550       smb2 max read (G)
5551
5552           This option specifies the protocol value that smbd(8) will return
5553           to a client, informing the client of the largest size that may be
5554           returned by a single SMB2 read call.
5555
5556           The maximum is 8388608 bytes (8MiB), which is the same as a Windows
5557           Server 2012 r2.
5558
5559           Please note that the default is 8MiB, but it´s limit is based on
5560           the smb2 dialect (64KiB for SMB == 2.0, 8MiB for SMB >= 2.1 with
5561           LargeMTU). Large MTU is not supported over NBT (tcp port 139).
5562
5563           Default: smb2 max read = 8388608
5564
5565       smb2 max trans (G)
5566
5567           This option specifies the protocol value that smbd(8) will return
5568           to a client, informing the client of the largest size of buffer
5569           that may be used in querying file meta-data via QUERY_INFO and
5570           related SMB2 calls.
5571
5572           The maximum is 8388608 bytes (8MiB), which is the same as a Windows
5573           Server 2012 r2.
5574
5575           Please note that the default is 8MiB, but it´s limit is based on
5576           the smb2 dialect (64KiB for SMB == 2.0, 1MiB for SMB >= 2.1 with
5577           LargeMTU). Large MTU is not supported over NBT (tcp port 139).
5578
5579           Default: smb2 max trans = 8388608
5580
5581       smb2 max write (G)
5582
5583           This option specifies the protocol value that smbd(8) will return
5584           to a client, informing the client of the largest size that may be
5585           sent to the server by a single SMB2 write call.
5586
5587           The maximum is 8388608 bytes (8MiB), which is the same as a Windows
5588           Server 2012 r2.
5589
5590           Please note that the default is 8MiB, but it´s limit is based on
5591           the smb2 dialect (64KiB for SMB == 2.0, 8MiB for SMB => 2.1 with
5592           LargeMTU). Large MTU is not supported over NBT (tcp port 139).
5593
5594           Default: smb2 max write = 8388608
5595
5596       smb ports (G)
5597
5598           Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.
5599
5600           Default: smb ports = 445 139
5601
5602       svcctl list (G)
5603
5604           This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd will use for
5605           starting and stopping Unix services via the Win32 ServiceControl
5606           API. This allows Windows administrators to utilize the MS
5607           Management Console plug-ins to manage a Unix server running Samba.
5608
5609           The administrator must create a directory name svcctl in Samba´s
5610           $(libdir) and create symbolic links to the init scripts in
5611           /etc/init.d/. The name of the links must match the names given as
5612           part of the svcctl list.
5613
5614           Default: svcctl list =
5615
5616           Example: svcctl list = cups postfix portmap httpd
5617
5618       time server (G)
5619
5620           This parameter determines if nmbd(8) advertises itself as a time
5621           server to Windows clients.
5622
5623           Default: time server = no
5624
5625       unicode (G)
5626
5627           Specifies whether the server and client should support unicode.
5628
5629           If this option is set to false, the use of ASCII will be forced.
5630
5631           Default: unicode = yes
5632
5633       unix extensions (G)
5634
5635           This boolean parameter controls whether Samba implements the CIFS
5636           UNIX extensions, as defined by HP. These extensions enable Samba to
5637           better serve UNIX CIFS clients by supporting features such as
5638           symbolic links, hard links, etc... These extensions require a
5639           similarly enabled client, and are of no current use to Windows
5640           clients.
5641
5642           Note if this parameter is turned on, the wide links parameter will
5643           automatically be disabled.
5644
5645           See the parameter allow insecure wide links if you wish to change
5646           this coupling between the two parameters.
5647
5648           Default: unix extensions = yes
5649
5650       use spnego (G)
5651
5652           This deprecated variable controls whether samba will try to use
5653           Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with
5654           WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication
5655           mechanism.
5656
5657           Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO
5658           implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled.
5659
5660           Default: use spnego = yes
5661
5662       web port (G)
5663
5664           Specifies which port the Samba web server should listen on.
5665
5666           Default: web port = 901
5667
5668           Example: web port = 80
5669
5670       write raw (G)
5671
5672           This is ignored if async echo handler is set, because this feature
5673           is incompatible with raw write SMB requests
5674
5675           If enabled, raw writes allow writes of 65535 bytes in one packet.
5676           This typically provides a major performance benefit for some very,
5677           very old clients.
5678
5679           However, some clients either negotiate the allowable block size
5680           incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block sizes, and
5681           for these clients you may need to disable raw writes.
5682
5683           In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool
5684           and left severely alone.
5685
5686           Default: write raw = yes
5687
5688       access based share enum (S)
5689
5690           If this parameter is yes for a service, then the share hosted by
5691           the service will only be visible to users who have read or write
5692           access to the share during share enumeration (for example net view
5693           \\sambaserver). The share ACLs which allow or deny the access to
5694           the share can be modified using for example the sharesec command or
5695           using the appropriate Windows tools. This has parallels to access
5696           based enumeration, the main difference being that only share
5697           permissions are evaluated, and security descriptors on files
5698           contained on the share are not used in computing enumeration access
5699           rights.
5700
5701           Default: access based share enum = no
5702
5703       acl group control (S)
5704
5705           In a POSIX filesystem, only the owner of a file or directory and
5706           the superuser can modify the permissions and ACLs on a file. If
5707           this parameter is set, then Samba overrides this restriction, and
5708           also allows the primary group owner of a file or directory to
5709           modify the permissions and ACLs on that file.
5710
5711           On a Windows server, groups may be the owner of a file or directory
5712           - thus allowing anyone in that group to modify the permissions on
5713           it. This allows the delegation of security controls on a point in
5714           the filesystem to the group owner of a directory and anything below
5715           it also owned by that group. This means there are multiple people
5716           with permissions to modify ACLs on a file or directory, easing
5717           manageability.
5718
5719           This parameter allows Samba to also permit delegation of the
5720           control over a point in the exported directory hierarchy in much
5721           the same way as Windows. This allows all members of a UNIX group to
5722           control the permissions on a file or directory they have group
5723           ownership on.
5724
5725           This parameter is best used with the inherit owner option and also
5726           on a share containing directories with the UNIX setgid bit set on
5727           them, which causes new files and directories created within it to
5728           inherit the group ownership from the containing directory.
5729
5730           This parameter was deprecated in Samba 3.0.23, but re-activated in
5731           Samba 3.0.31 and above, as it now only controls permission changes
5732           if the user is in the owning primary group. It is now no longer
5733           equivalent to the dos filemode option.
5734
5735           Default: acl group control = no
5736
5737       admin users (S)
5738
5739           This is a list of users who will be granted administrative
5740           privileges on the share. This means that they will do all file
5741           operations as the super-user (root).
5742
5743           You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list
5744           will be able to do anything they like on the share, irrespective of
5745           file permissions.
5746
5747           Default: admin users =
5748
5749           Example: admin users = jason
5750
5751       algorithmic rid base (G)
5752
5753           This determines how Samba will use its algorithmic mapping from
5754           uids/gid to the RIDs needed to construct NT Security Identifiers.
5755
5756           Setting this option to a larger value could be useful to sites
5757           transitioning from WinNT and Win2k, as existing user and group rids
5758           would otherwise clash with system users etc.
5759
5760           All UIDs and GIDs must be able to be resolved into SIDs for the
5761           correct operation of ACLs on the server. As such the algorithmic
5762           mapping can´t be ´turned off´, but pushing it ´out of the way´
5763           should resolve the issues. Users and groups can then be assigned
5764           ´low´ RIDs in arbitrary-rid supporting backends.
5765
5766           Default: algorithmic rid base = 1000
5767
5768           Example: algorithmic rid base = 100000
5769
5770       allow dcerpc auth level connect (G)
5771
5772           This option controls whether DCERPC services are allowed to be used
5773           with DCERPC_AUTH_LEVEL_CONNECT, which provides authentication, but
5774           no per message integrity nor privacy protection.
5775
5776           Some interfaces like samr, lsarpc and netlogon have a hard-coded
5777           default of no and epmapper, mgmt and rpcecho have a hard-coded
5778           default of yes.
5779
5780           The behavior can be overwritten per interface name (e.g. lsarpc,
5781           netlogon, samr, srvsvc, winreg, wkssvc ...) by using ´allow dcerpc
5782           auth level connect:interface = yes´ as option.
5783
5784           This option yields precedence to the implementation specific
5785           restrictions. E.g. the drsuapi and backupkey protocols require
5786           DCERPC_AUTH_LEVEL_PRIVACY. The dnsserver protocol requires
5787           DCERPC_AUTH_LEVEL_INTEGRITY.
5788
5789           Default: allow dcerpc auth level connect = no
5790
5791           Example: allow dcerpc auth level connect = yes
5792
5793       allow trusted domains (G)
5794
5795           This option only takes effect when the security option is set to
5796           server, domain or ads. If it is set to no, then attempts to connect
5797           to a resource from a domain or workgroup other than the one which
5798           smbd is running in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the
5799           remote server doing the authentication.
5800
5801           This is useful if you only want your Samba server to serve
5802           resources to users in the domain it is a member of. As an example,
5803           suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB. DOMB is trusted
5804           by DOMA, which contains the Samba server. Under normal
5805           circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the
5806           resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the Samba
5807           server even if they do not have an account in DOMA. This can make
5808           implementing a security boundary difficult.
5809
5810           Default: allow trusted domains = yes
5811
5812       auth methods (G)
5813
5814           This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication
5815           methods smbd will use when authenticating a user. This option
5816           defaults to sensible values based on security. This should be
5817           considered a developer option and used only in rare circumstances.
5818           In the majority (if not all) of production servers, the default
5819           setting should be adequate.
5820
5821           Each entry in the list attempts to authenticate the user in turn,
5822           until the user authenticates. In practice only one method will ever
5823           actually be able to complete the authentication.
5824
5825           Possible options include guest (anonymous access), sam (lookups in
5826           local list of accounts based on netbios name or domain name),
5827           winbind (relay authentication requests for remote users through
5828           winbindd), ntdomain (pre-winbindd method of authentication for
5829           remote domain users; deprecated in favour of winbind method),
5830           trustdomain (authenticate trusted users by contacting the remote DC
5831           directly from smbd; deprecated in favour of winbind method).
5832
5833           Default: auth methods =
5834
5835           Example: auth methods = guest sam winbind
5836
5837       check password script (G)
5838
5839           The name of a program that can be used to check password
5840           complexity. The password is sent to the program´s standard input.
5841
5842           The program must return 0 on a good password, or any other value if
5843           the password is bad. In case the password is considered weak (the
5844           program does not return 0) the user will be notified and the
5845           password change will fail.
5846
5847           Note: In the example directory is a sample program called
5848           crackcheck that uses cracklib to check the password quality.
5849
5850           Default: check password script =  # Disabled
5851
5852           Example: check password script = /usr/local/sbin/crackcheck
5853
5854       client ipc signing (G)
5855
5856           This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB
5857           signing for IPC$ connections as DCERPC transport. Possible values
5858           are auto, mandatory and disabled.
5859
5860           When set to mandatory or default, SMB signing is required.
5861
5862           When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced and if
5863           set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either.
5864
5865           Connections from winbindd to Active Directory Domain Controllers
5866           always enforce signing.
5867
5868           Default: client ipc signing = default
5869
5870       client lanman auth (G)
5871
5872           This parameter determines whether or not smbclient(8) and other
5873           samba client tools will attempt to authenticate itself to servers
5874           using the weaker LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only server
5875           which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000, Samba,
5876           etc... but not Windows 95/98) will be able to be connected from the
5877           Samba client.
5878
5879           The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to its
5880           case-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm. Clients
5881           without Windows 95/98 servers are advised to disable this option.
5882
5883           Disabling this option will also disable the client plaintext auth
5884           option.
5885
5886           Likewise, if the client ntlmv2 auth parameter is enabled, then only
5887           NTLMv2 logins will be attempted.
5888
5889           Default: client lanman auth = no
5890
5891       client NTLMv2 auth (G)
5892
5893           This parameter determines whether or not smbclient(8) will attempt
5894           to authenticate itself to servers using the NTLMv2 encrypted
5895           password response.
5896
5897           If enabled, only an NTLMv2 and LMv2 response (both much more secure
5898           than earlier versions) will be sent. Older servers (including NT4 <
5899           SP4, Win9x and Samba 2.2) are not compatible with NTLMv2 when not
5900           in an NTLMv2 supporting domain
5901
5902           Similarly, if enabled, NTLMv1, client lanman auth and client
5903           plaintext auth authentication will be disabled. This also disables
5904           share-level authentication.
5905
5906           If disabled, an NTLM response (and possibly a LANMAN response) will
5907           be sent by the client, depending on the value of client lanman
5908           auth.
5909
5910           Note that Windows Vista and later versions already use NTLMv2 by
5911           default, and some sites (particularly those following ´best
5912           practice´ security polices) only allow NTLMv2 responses, and not
5913           the weaker LM or NTLM.
5914
5915           When client use spnego is also set to yes extended security
5916           (SPNEGO) is required in order to use NTLMv2 only within NTLMSSP.
5917           This behavior was introduced with the patches for CVE-2016-2111.
5918
5919           Default: client NTLMv2 auth = yes
5920
5921       client plaintext auth (G)
5922
5923           Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext password if the
5924           server does not support encrypted passwords.
5925
5926           Default: client plaintext auth = no
5927
5928       client schannel (G)
5929
5930           This controls whether the client offers or even demands the use of
5931           the netlogon schannel.  client schannel = no does not offer the
5932           schannel, client schannel = auto offers the schannel but does not
5933           enforce it, and client schannel = yes denies access if the server
5934           is not able to speak netlogon schannel.
5935
5936           Note that for active directory domains this is hardcoded to client
5937           schannel = yes.
5938
5939           This option yields precedence to the require strong key option.
5940
5941           Default: client schannel = auto
5942
5943           Example: client schannel = yes
5944
5945       client signing (G)
5946
5947           This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB
5948           signing. Possible values are auto, mandatory and disabled.
5949
5950           When set to auto or default, SMB signing is offered, but not
5951           enforced.
5952
5953           When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to
5954           disabled, SMB signing is not offered either.
5955
5956           IPC$ connections for DCERPC e.g. in winbindd, are handled by the
5957           client ipc signing option.
5958
5959           Default: client signing = default
5960
5961       client use spnego principal (G)
5962
5963           This parameter determines whether or not smbclient(8) and other
5964           samba components acting as a client will attempt to use the
5965           server-supplied principal sometimes given in the SPNEGO exchange.
5966
5967           If enabled, Samba can attempt to use Kerberos to contact servers
5968           known only by IP address. Kerberos relies on names, so ordinarily
5969           cannot function in this situation.
5970
5971           This is a VERY BAD IDEA for security reasons, and so this parameter
5972           SHOULD NOT BE USED. It will be removed in a future version of
5973           Samba.
5974
5975           If disabled, Samba will use the name used to look up the server
5976           when asking the KDC for a ticket. This avoids situations where a
5977           server may impersonate another, soliciting authentication as one
5978           principal while being known on the network as another.
5979
5980           Note that Windows XP SP2 and later versions already follow this
5981           behaviour, and Windows Vista and later servers no longer supply
5982           this ´rfc4178 hint´ principal on the server side.
5983
5984           This parameter is deprecated in Samba 4.2.1 and will be removed
5985           (along with the functionality) in a later release of Samba.
5986
5987           Default: client use spnego principal = no
5988
5989       create mode
5990
5991           This parameter is a synonym for create mask.
5992
5993       create mask (S)
5994
5995           When a file is created, the necessary permissions are calculated
5996           according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and
5997           the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise ´AND´ed with this
5998           parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for
5999           the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit not set here will be removed from
6000           the modes set on a file when it is created.
6001
6002           The default value of this parameter removes the group and other
6003           write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.
6004
6005           Following this Samba will bit-wise ´OR´ the UNIX mode created from
6006           this parameter with the value of the force create mode parameter
6007           which is set to 000 by default.
6008
6009           This parameter does not affect directory masks. See the parameter
6010           directory mask for details.
6011
6012           Default: create mask = 0744
6013
6014           Example: create mask = 0775
6015
6016       dedicated keytab file (G)
6017
6018           Specifies the path to the kerberos keytab file when kerberos method
6019           is set to "dedicated keytab".
6020
6021           Default: dedicated keytab file =
6022
6023           Example: dedicated keytab file = /usr/local/etc/krb5.keytab
6024
6025       directory mode
6026
6027           This parameter is a synonym for directory mask.
6028
6029       directory mask (S)
6030
6031           This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting
6032           DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories.
6033
6034           When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are
6035           calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX
6036           permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise ´AND´ed
6037           with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise
6038           MASK for the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit not set here will
6039           be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is created.
6040
6041           The default value of this parameter removes the ´group´ and ´other´
6042           write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the user who owns the
6043           directory to modify it.
6044
6045           Following this Samba will bit-wise ´OR´ the UNIX mode created from
6046           this parameter with the value of the force directory mode
6047           parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by default (i.e. no extra
6048           mode bits are added).
6049
6050           Default: directory mask = 0755
6051
6052           Example: directory mask = 0775
6053
6054       directory security mask (S)
6055
6056           This parameter has been removed for Samba 4.0.0.
6057
6058           No default
6059
6060       encrypt passwords (G)
6061
6062           This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be
6063           negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and above
6064           and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords
6065           unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in
6066           Samba see the chapter "User Database" in the Samba HOWTO
6067           Collection.
6068
6069           MS Windows clients that expect Microsoft encrypted passwords and
6070           that do not have plain text password support enabled will be able
6071           to connect only to a Samba server that has encrypted password
6072           support enabled and for which the user accounts have a valid
6073           encrypted password. Refer to the smbpasswd command man page for
6074           information regarding the creation of encrypted passwords for user
6075           accounts.
6076
6077           The use of plain text passwords is NOT advised as support for this
6078           feature is no longer maintained in Microsoft Windows products. If
6079           you want to use plain text passwords you must set this parameter to
6080           no.
6081
6082           In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly smbd(8) must
6083           either have access to a local smbpasswd(5) file (see the
6084           smbpasswd(8) program for information on how to set up and maintain
6085           this file), or set the security = [domain|ads] parameter which
6086           causes smbd to authenticate against another server.
6087
6088           Default: encrypt passwords = yes
6089
6090       force create mode (S)
6091
6092           This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that
6093           will always be set on a file created by Samba. This is done by
6094           bitwise ´OR´ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is
6095           being created. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 000.
6096           The modes in this parameter are bitwise ´OR´ed onto the file mode
6097           after the mask set in the create mask parameter is applied.
6098
6099           The example below would force all newly created files to have read
6100           and execute permissions set for ´group´ and ´other´ as well as the
6101           read/write/execute bits set for the ´user´.
6102
6103           Default: force create mode = 0000
6104
6105           Example: force create mode = 0755
6106
6107       force directory mode (S)
6108
6109           This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that
6110           will always be set on a directory created by Samba. This is done by
6111           bitwise ´OR´ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that
6112           is being created. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 0000
6113           which will not add any extra permission bits to a created
6114           directory. This operation is done after the mode mask in the
6115           parameter directory mask is applied.
6116
6117           The example below would force all created directories to have read
6118           and execute permissions set for ´group´ and ´other´ as well as the
6119           read/write/execute bits set for the ´user´.
6120
6121           Default: force directory mode = 0000
6122
6123           Example: force directory mode = 0755
6124
6125       force directory security mode (S)
6126
6127           This parameter has been removed for Samba 4.0.0.
6128
6129           No default
6130
6131       group
6132
6133           This parameter is a synonym for force group.
6134
6135       force group (S)
6136
6137           This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the
6138           default primary group for all users connecting to this service.
6139           This is useful for sharing files by ensuring that all access to
6140           files on service will use the named group for their permissions
6141           checking. Thus, by assigning permissions for this group to the
6142           files and directories within this service the Samba administrator
6143           can restrict or allow sharing of these files.
6144
6145           In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter has extended functionality
6146           in the following way. If the group name listed here has a ´+´
6147           character prepended to it then the current user accessing the share
6148           only has the primary group default assigned to this group if they
6149           are already assigned as a member of that group. This allows an
6150           administrator to decide that only users who are already in a
6151           particular group will create files with group ownership set to that
6152           group. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment. For
6153           example, the setting force group = +sys means that only users who
6154           are already in group sys will have their default primary group
6155           assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All other users
6156           will retain their ordinary primary group.
6157
6158           If the force user parameter is also set the group specified in
6159           force group will override the primary group set in force user.
6160
6161           Default: force group =
6162
6163           Example: force group = agroup
6164
6165       force security mode (S)
6166
6167           This parameter has been removed for Samba 4.0.0.
6168
6169           No default
6170
6171       force unknown acl user (S)
6172
6173           If this parameter is set, a Windows NT ACL that contains an unknown
6174           SID (security descriptor, or representation of a user or group id)
6175           as the owner or group owner of the file will be silently mapped
6176           into the current UNIX uid or gid of the currently connected user.
6177
6178           This is designed to allow Windows NT clients to copy files and
6179           folders containing ACLs that were created locally on the client
6180           machine and contain users local to that machine only (no domain
6181           users) to be copied to a Samba server (usually with XCOPY /O) and
6182           have the unknown userid and groupid of the file owner map to the
6183           current connected user. This can only be fixed correctly when
6184           winbindd allows arbitrary mapping from any Windows NT SID to a UNIX
6185           uid or gid.
6186
6187           Try using this parameter when XCOPY /O gives an ACCESS_DENIED
6188           error.
6189
6190           Default: force unknown acl user = no
6191
6192       force user (S)
6193
6194           This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the
6195           default user for all users connecting to this service. This is
6196           useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully as using
6197           it incorrectly can cause security problems.
6198
6199           This user name only gets used once a connection is established.
6200           Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a
6201           valid password. Once connected, all file operations will be
6202           performed as the "forced user", no matter what username the client
6203           connected as. This can be very useful.
6204
6205           In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the primary
6206           group of the forced user to be used as the primary group for all
6207           file activity. Prior to 2.0.5 the primary group was left as the
6208           primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug).
6209
6210           Default: force user =
6211
6212           Example: force user = auser
6213
6214       guest account (G)
6215
6216           This is a username which will be used for access to services which
6217           are specified as guest ok (see below). Whatever privileges this
6218           user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest
6219           service. This user must exist in the password file, but does not
6220           require a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good
6221           choice for this parameter.
6222
6223           On some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able
6224           to print. Use another account in this case. You should test this by
6225           trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the su -
6226           command) and trying to print using the system print command such as
6227           lpr(1) or lp(1).
6228
6229           This parameter does not accept % macros, because many parts of the
6230           system require this value to be constant for correct operation.
6231
6232           Default: guest account = nobody # default can be changed at
6233           compile-time
6234
6235           Example: guest account = ftp
6236
6237       public
6238
6239           This parameter is a synonym for guest ok.
6240
6241       guest ok (S)
6242
6243           If this parameter is yes for a service, then no password is
6244           required to connect to the service. Privileges will be those of the
6245           guest account.
6246
6247           This parameter nullifies the benefits of setting restrict anonymous
6248           = 2
6249
6250           See the section below on security for more information about this
6251           option.
6252
6253           Default: guest ok = no
6254
6255       only guest
6256
6257           This parameter is a synonym for guest only.
6258
6259       guest only (S)
6260
6261           If this parameter is yes for a service, then only guest connections
6262           to the service are permitted. This parameter will have no effect if
6263           guest ok is not set for the service.
6264
6265           See the section below on security for more information about this
6266           option.
6267
6268           Default: guest only = no
6269
6270       allow hosts
6271
6272           This parameter is a synonym for hosts allow.
6273
6274       hosts allow (S)
6275
6276           A synonym for this parameter is allow hosts.
6277
6278           This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts
6279           which are permitted to access a service.
6280
6281           If specified in the [global] section then it will apply to all
6282           services, regardless of whether the individual service has a
6283           different setting.
6284
6285           You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For example, you
6286           could restrict access to only the hosts on a Class C subnet with
6287           something like allow hosts = 150.203.5.. The full syntax of the
6288           list is described in the man page hosts_access(5). Note that this
6289           man page may not be present on your system, so a brief description
6290           will be given here also.
6291
6292           Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always be allowed
6293           access unless specifically denied by a hosts deny option.
6294
6295           You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup
6296           names if your system supports netgroups. The EXCEPT keyword can
6297           also be used to limit a wildcard list. The following examples may
6298           provide some help:
6299
6300           Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one
6301
6302           hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66
6303
6304           Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask
6305
6306           hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0
6307
6308           Example 3: allow a couple of hosts
6309
6310           hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur
6311
6312           Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but deny
6313           access from one particular host
6314
6315           hosts allow = @foonet
6316
6317           hosts deny = pirate
6318
6319               Note
6320               Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.
6321           See testparm(1) for a way of testing your host access to see if it
6322           does what you expect.
6323
6324           Default: hosts allow =  # none (i.e., all hosts permitted access)
6325
6326           Example: hosts allow = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au
6327
6328       deny hosts
6329
6330           This parameter is a synonym for hosts deny.
6331
6332       hosts deny (S)
6333
6334           The opposite of hosts allow - hosts listed here are NOT permitted
6335           access to services unless the specific services have their own
6336           lists to override this one. Where the lists conflict, the allow
6337           list takes precedence.
6338
6339           In the event that it is necessary to deny all by default, use the
6340           keyword ALL (or the netmask 0.0.0.0/0) and then explicitly specify
6341           to the hosts allow = hosts allow parameter those hosts that should
6342           be permitted access.
6343
6344           Default: hosts deny =  # none (i.e., no hosts specifically
6345           excluded)
6346
6347           Example: hosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au
6348
6349       inherit acls (S)
6350
6351           This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls exist on
6352           parent directories, they are always honored when creating a new
6353           file or subdirectory in these parent directories. The default
6354           behavior is to use the unix mode specified when creating the
6355           directory. Enabling this option sets the unix mode to 0777, thus
6356           guaranteeing that default directory acls are propagated. Note that
6357           using the VFS modules acl_xattr or acl_tdb which store native
6358           Windows as meta-data will automatically turn this option on for any
6359           share for which they are loaded, as they require this option to
6360           emulate Windows ACLs correctly.
6361
6362           Default: inherit acls = no
6363
6364       inherit owner (S)
6365
6366           The ownership of new files and directories is normally governed by
6367           effective uid of the connected user. This option allows the Samba
6368           administrator to specify that the ownership for new files and
6369           directories should be controlled by the ownership of the parent
6370           directory.
6371
6372           Common scenarios where this behavior is useful is in implementing
6373           drop-boxes, where users can create and edit files but not delete
6374           them and ensuring that newly created files in a user´s roaming
6375           profile directory are actually owned by the user.
6376
6377           Default: inherit owner = no
6378
6379       inherit permissions (S)
6380
6381           The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed
6382           by create mask, directory mask, force create mode and force
6383           directory mode but the boolean inherit permissions parameter
6384           overrides this.
6385
6386           New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, including
6387           bits such as setgid.
6388
6389           New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent directory.
6390           Their execute bits continue to be determined by map archive, map
6391           hidden and map system as usual.
6392
6393           Note that the setuid bit is never set via inheritance (the code
6394           explicitly prohibits this).
6395
6396           This can be particularly useful on large systems with many users,
6397           perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] share to be
6398           used flexibly by each user.
6399
6400           Default: inherit permissions = no
6401
6402       invalid users (S)
6403
6404           This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this
6405           service. This is really a paranoid check to absolutely ensure an
6406           improper setting does not breach your security.
6407
6408           A name starting with a ´@´ is interpreted as an NIS netgroup first
6409           (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX group if the name
6410           was not found in the NIS netgroup database.
6411
6412           A name starting with ´+´ is interpreted only by looking in the UNIX
6413           group database via the NSS getgrnam() interface. A name starting
6414           with ´&´ is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup
6415           database (this requires NIS to be working on your system). The
6416           characters ´+´ and ´&´ may be used at the start of the name in
6417           either order so the value +&group means check the UNIX group
6418           database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and the value
6419           &+group means check the NIS netgroup database, followed by the UNIX
6420           group database (the same as the ´@´ prefix).
6421
6422           The current servicename is substituted for %S. This is useful in
6423           the [homes] section.
6424
6425           Default: invalid users =  # no invalid users
6426
6427           Example: invalid users = root fred admin @wheel
6428
6429       kerberos method (G)
6430
6431           Controls how kerberos tickets are verified.
6432
6433           Valid options are:
6434
6435           ·   secrets only - use only the secrets.(n)tdb for ticket
6436               verification (default)
6437
6438           ·   system keytab - use only the system keytab for ticket
6439               verification
6440
6441           ·   dedicated keytab - use a dedicated keytab for ticket
6442               verification
6443
6444           ·   secrets and keytab - use the secrets.(n)tdb first, then the
6445               system keytab
6446
6447       The major difference between "system keytab" and "dedicated keytab" is
6448       that the latter method relies on kerberos to find the correct keytab
6449       entry instead of filtering based on expected principals.
6450
6451       When the kerberos method is in "dedicated keytab" mode, dedicated
6452       keytab file must be set to specify the location of the keytab file.
6453
6454       Default: kerberos method = default
6455
6456       kpasswd port (G)
6457
6458           Specifies which ports the Kerberos server should listen on for
6459           password changes.
6460
6461           Default: kpasswd port = 464
6462
6463       krb5 port (G)
6464
6465           Specifies which port the KDC should listen on for Kerberos traffic.
6466
6467           Default: krb5 port = 88
6468
6469       lanman auth (G)
6470
6471           This parameter determines whether or not smbd(8) will attempt to
6472           authenticate users or permit password changes using the LANMAN
6473           password hash. If disabled, only clients which support NT password
6474           hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, but not Windows
6475           95/98 or the MS DOS network client) will be able to connect to the
6476           Samba host.
6477
6478           The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to its
6479           case-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm. Servers
6480           without Windows 95/98/ME or MS DOS clients are advised to disable
6481           this option.
6482
6483           When this parameter is set to no this will also result in
6484           sambaLMPassword in Samba´s passdb being blanked after the next
6485           password change. As a result of that lanman clients won´t be able
6486           to authenticate, even if lanman auth is reenabled later on.
6487
6488           Unlike the encrypt passwords option, this parameter cannot alter
6489           client behaviour, and the LANMAN response will still be sent over
6490           the network. See the client lanman auth to disable this for Samba´s
6491           clients (such as smbclient)
6492
6493           If this option, and ntlm auth are both disabled, then only NTLMv2
6494           logins will be permited. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most
6495           will require special configuration to use it.
6496
6497           Default: lanman auth = no
6498
6499       log nt token command (G)
6500
6501           This option can be set to a command that will be called when new nt
6502           tokens are created.
6503
6504           This is only useful for development purposes.
6505
6506           Default: log nt token command =
6507
6508       map to guest (G)
6509
6510           This parameter can take four different values, which tell smbd(8)
6511           what to do with user login requests that don´t match a valid UNIX
6512           user in some way.
6513
6514           The four settings are :
6515
6516           ·   Never - Means user login requests with an invalid password are
6517               rejected. This is the default.
6518
6519           ·   Bad User - Means user logins with an invalid password are
6520               rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it
6521               is treated as a guest login and mapped into the guest account.
6522
6523           ·   Bad Password - Means user logins with an invalid password are
6524               treated as a guest login and mapped into the guest account.
6525               Note that this can cause problems as it means that any user
6526               incorrectly typing their password will be silently logged on as
6527               "guest" - and will not know the reason they cannot access files
6528               they think they should - there will have been no message given
6529               to them that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services
6530               will hate you if you set the map to guest parameter this way
6531               :-).
6532
6533           ·   Bad Uid - Is only applicable when Samba is configured in some
6534               type of domain mode security (security = {domain|ads}) and
6535               means that user logins which are successfully authenticated but
6536               which have no valid Unix user account (and smbd is unable to
6537               create one) should be mapped to the defined guest account. This
6538               was the default behavior of Samba 2.x releases. Note that if a
6539               member server is running winbindd, this option should never be
6540               required because the nss_winbind library will export the
6541               Windows domain users and groups to the underlying OS via the
6542               Name Service Switch interface.
6543
6544       Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest" share services.
6545       This is because in these modes the name of the resource being requested
6546       is not sent to the server until after the server has successfully
6547       authenticated the client so the server cannot make authentication
6548       decisions at the correct time (connection to the share) for "Guest"
6549       shares.
6550
6551       Default: map to guest = Never
6552
6553       Example: map to guest = Bad User
6554
6555       map untrusted to domain (G)
6556
6557           If a client connects to smbd using an untrusted domain name, such
6558           as BOGUS\user, smbd replaces the BOGUS domain with it´s SAM name
6559           before attempting to authenticate that user. In the case where smbd
6560           is acting as a PDC this will be DOMAIN\user. In the case where smbd
6561           is acting as a domain member server or a standalone server this
6562           will be WORKSTATION\user.
6563
6564           In previous versions of Samba (pre 3.4), if smbd was acting as a
6565           domain member server, the BOGUS domain name would instead be
6566           replaced by the primary domain which smbd was a member of. In this
6567           case authentication would be deferred off to a DC using the
6568           credentials DOMAIN\user.
6569
6570           When this parameter is set to yes smbd provides the legacy behavior
6571           of mapping untrusted domain names to the primary domain. When smbd
6572           is not acting as a domain member server, this parameter has no
6573           effect.
6574
6575           Default: map untrusted to domain = no
6576
6577       ntlm auth (G)
6578
6579           This parameter determines whether or not smbd(8) will attempt to
6580           authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response. If
6581           disabled, either the lanman password hash or an NTLMv2 response
6582           will need to be sent by the client.
6583
6584           If this option, and lanman auth are both disabled, then only NTLMv2
6585           logins will be permited. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most
6586           will require special configuration to use it.
6587
6588           Default: ntlm auth = yes
6589
6590       ntp signd socket directory (G)
6591
6592           This setting controls the location of the socket that the NTP
6593           daemon uses to communicate with Samba for signing packets.
6594
6595           If a non-default path is specified here, then it is also necessary
6596           to make NTP aware of the new path using the ntpsigndsocket
6597           directive in ntp.conf.
6598
6599           Default: ntp signd socket directory = /var/lib/samba/ntp_signd
6600
6601       null passwords (G)
6602
6603           Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null
6604           passwords.
6605
6606           See also smbpasswd(5).
6607
6608           Default: null passwords = no
6609
6610       obey pam restrictions (G)
6611
6612           When Samba 3.0 is configured to enable PAM support (i.e.
6613           --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba
6614           should obey PAM´s account and session management directives. The
6615           default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only
6616           and to ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba
6617           always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of encrypt
6618           passwords = yes. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the
6619           challenge/response authentication mechanism needed in the presence
6620           of SMB password encryption.
6621
6622           Default: obey pam restrictions = no
6623
6624       old password allowed period (G)
6625
6626           Number of minutes to permit an NTLM login after a password change
6627           or reset using the old password. This allows the user to re-cache
6628           the new password on multiple clients without disrupting a network
6629           reconnection in the meantime.
6630
6631           This parameter only applies when server role is set to Active
6632           Directory Domain Controller
6633
6634           Default: old password allowed period = 60
6635
6636       only user (S)
6637
6638           To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the
6639           valid users parameter.
6640
6641           This parameter is deprecated
6642
6643           However, it currently operates only in conjunction with username.
6644           The supported way to restrict a service to a particular set of
6645           users is the valid users parameter.
6646
6647           Default: only user = no
6648
6649       pam password change (G)
6650
6651           With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, this
6652           parameter, it is possible to use PAM´s password change control flag
6653           for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password changes
6654           when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in
6655           passwd program. It should be possible to enable this without
6656           changing your passwd chat parameter for most setups.
6657
6658           Default: pam password change = no
6659
6660       passdb backend (G)
6661
6662           This option allows the administrator to chose which backend will be
6663           used for storing user and possibly group information. This allows
6664           you to swap between different storage mechanisms without recompile.
6665
6666           The parameter value is divided into two parts, the backend´s name,
6667           and a ´location´ string that has meaning only to that particular
6668           backed. These are separated by a : character.
6669
6670           Available backends can include:
6671
6672           ·   smbpasswd - The old plaintext passdb backend. Some Samba
6673               features will not work if this passdb backend is used. Takes a
6674               path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument.
6675
6676           ·   tdbsam - The TDB based password storage backend. Takes a path
6677               to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb in
6678               the private dir directory.
6679
6680           ·   ldapsam - The LDAP based passdb backend. Takes an LDAP URL as
6681               an optional argument (defaults to ldap://localhost)
6682
6683               LDAP connections should be secured where possible. This may be
6684               done using either Start-TLS (see ldap ssl) or by specifying
6685               ldaps:// in the URL argument.
6686
6687               Multiple servers may also be specified in double-quotes.
6688               Whether multiple servers are supported or not and the exact
6689               syntax depends on the LDAP library you use.
6690
6691
6692            Examples of use are:
6693
6694           passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb
6695
6696           or multi server LDAP URL with OpenLDAP library:
6697
6698           passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap-1.example.com ldap://ldap-2.example.com"
6699
6700           or multi server LDAP URL with Netscape based LDAP library:
6701
6702           passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap-1.example.com ldap-2.example.com"
6703
6704       Default: passdb backend = tdbsam
6705
6706       passdb expand explicit (G)
6707
6708           This parameter controls whether Samba substitutes %-macros in the
6709           passdb fields if they are explicitly set. We used to expand macros
6710           here, but this turned out to be a bug because the Windows client
6711           can expand a variable %G_osver% in which %G would have been
6712           substituted by the user´s primary group.
6713
6714           Default: passdb expand explicit = no
6715
6716       passwd chat (G)
6717
6718           This string controls the "chat" conversation that takes places
6719           between smbd(8) and the local password changing program to change
6720           the user´s password. The string describes a sequence of
6721           response-receive pairs that smbd(8) uses to determine what to send
6722           to the passwd program and what to expect back. If the expected
6723           output is not received then the password is not changed.
6724
6725           This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending on what
6726           local methods are used for password control (such as NIS etc).
6727
6728           Note that this parameter only is used if the unix password sync
6729           parameter is set to yes. This sequence is then called AS ROOT when
6730           the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without
6731           access to the old password cleartext. This means that root must be
6732           able to reset the user´s password without knowing the text of the
6733           previous password. In the presence of NIS/YP, this means that the
6734           passwd program must be executed on the NIS master.
6735
6736           The string can contain the macro %n which is substituted for the
6737           new password. The old passsword (%o) is only available when encrypt
6738           passwords has been disabled. The chat sequence can also contain the
6739           standard macros \n, \r, \t and \s to give line-feed,
6740           carriage-return, tab and space. The chat sequence string can also
6741           contain a ´*´ which matches any sequence of characters. Double
6742           quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces in them into a
6743           single string.
6744
6745           If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a full stop
6746           ".", then no string is sent. Similarly, if the expect string is a
6747           full stop then no string is expected.
6748
6749           If the pam password change parameter is set to yes, the chat pairs
6750           may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM
6751           result, not any particular output. The \n macro is ignored for PAM
6752           conversions.
6753
6754           Default: passwd chat = *new*password* %n\n *new*password* %n\n
6755           *changed*
6756
6757           Example: passwd chat = "*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW
6758           password*" %n\n "*Password changed*"
6759
6760       passwd chat debug (G)
6761
6762           This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run
6763           in debug mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from
6764           the passwd chat are printed in the smbd(8) log with a debug level
6765           of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext
6766           passwords to be seen in the smbd log. It is available to help Samba
6767           admins debug their passwd chat scripts when calling the passwd
6768           program and should be turned off after this has been done. This
6769           option has no effect if the pam password change parameter is set.
6770           This parameter is off by default.
6771
6772           Default: passwd chat debug = no
6773
6774       passwd chat timeout (G)
6775
6776           This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an
6777           initial answer from a passwd chat script being run. Once the
6778           initial answer is received the subsequent answers must be received
6779           in one tenth of this time. The default it two seconds.
6780
6781           Default: passwd chat timeout = 2
6782
6783       passwd program (G)
6784
6785           The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords.
6786           Any occurrences of %u will be replaced with the user name. The user
6787           name is checked for existence before calling the password changing
6788           program.
6789
6790           Also note that many passwd programs insist in reasonable passwords,
6791           such as a minimum length, or the inclusion of mixed case chars and
6792           digits. This can pose a problem as some clients (such as Windows
6793           for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending it.
6794
6795           Note that if the unix password sync parameter is set to yes then
6796           this program is called AS ROOT before the SMB password in the
6797           smbpasswd file is changed. If this UNIX password change fails, then
6798           smbd will fail to change the SMB password also (this is by design).
6799
6800           If the unix password sync parameter is set this parameter MUST USE
6801           ABSOLUTE PATHS for ALL programs called, and must be examined for
6802           security implications. Note that by default unix password sync is
6803           set to no.
6804
6805           Default: passwd program =
6806
6807           Example: passwd program = /bin/passwd %u
6808
6809       password server (G)
6810
6811           By specifying the name of a domain controller with this option, and
6812           using security = [ads|domain] it is possible to get Samba to do all
6813           its username/password validation using a specific remote server.
6814
6815           Ideally, this option should not be used, as the default ´*´
6816           indicates to Samba to determine the best DC to contact dynamically,
6817           just as all other hosts in an AD domain do. This allows the domain
6818           to be maintained (addition and removal of domain controllers)
6819           without modification to the smb.conf file. The cryptographic
6820           protection on the authenticated RPC calls used to verify passwords
6821           ensures that this default is safe.
6822
6823           It is strongly recommended that you use the default of ´*´, however
6824           if in your particular environment you have reason to specify a
6825           particular DC list, then the list of machines in this option must
6826           be a list of names or IP addresses of Domain controllers for the
6827           Domain. If you use the default of ´*´, or list several hosts in the
6828           password server option then smbd will try each in turn till it
6829           finds one that responds. This is useful in case your primary server
6830           goes down.
6831
6832           If the list of servers contains both names/IP´s and the ´*´
6833           character, the list is treated as a list of preferred domain
6834           controllers, but an auto lookup of all remaining DC´s will be added
6835           to the list as well. Samba will not attempt to optimize this list
6836           by locating the closest DC.
6837
6838           If parameter is a name, it is looked up using the parameter name
6839           resolve order and so may resolved by any method and order described
6840           in that parameter.
6841
6842           Default: password server = *
6843
6844           Example: password server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2, *
6845
6846           Example: password server = windc.mydomain.com:389 192.168.1.101 *
6847
6848       preload modules (G)
6849
6850           This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd
6851           before a client connects. This improves the speed of smbd when
6852           reacting to new connections somewhat.
6853
6854           Default: preload modules =
6855
6856           Example: preload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so
6857
6858       private directory
6859
6860           This parameter is a synonym for private dir.
6861
6862       private dir (G)
6863
6864           This parameters defines the directory smbd will use for storing
6865           such files as smbpasswd and secrets.tdb (or secrets.ntdb).
6866
6867           Default: private dir = /var/lib/samba/private
6868
6869       raw NTLMv2 auth (G)
6870
6871           This parameter determines whether or not smbd(8) will allow SMB1
6872           clients without extended security (without SPNEGO) to use NTLMv2
6873           authentication.
6874
6875           If this option, lanman auth and ntlm auth are all disabled, then
6876           only clients with SPNEGO support will be permitted. That means
6877           NTLMv2 is only supported within NTLMSSP.
6878
6879           Default: raw NTLMv2 auth = no
6880
6881       read list (S)
6882
6883           This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a
6884           service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not
6885           be given write access, no matter what the read only option is set
6886           to. The list can include group names using the syntax described in
6887           the invalid users parameter.
6888
6889           Default: read list =
6890
6891           Example: read list = mary, @students
6892
6893       write ok
6894
6895           This parameter is a synonym for read only.
6896
6897       read only (S)
6898
6899           An inverted synonym is writeable.
6900
6901           If this parameter is yes, then users of a service may not create or
6902           modify files in the service´s directory.
6903
6904           Note that a printable service (printable = yes) will ALWAYS allow
6905           writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via
6906           spooling operations.
6907
6908           Default: read only = yes
6909
6910       rename user script (G)
6911
6912           This is the full pathname to a script that will be run as root by
6913           smbd(8) under special circumstances described below.
6914
6915           When a user with admin authority or SeAddUserPrivilege rights
6916           renames a user (e.g.: from the NT4 User Manager for Domains), this
6917           script will be run to rename the POSIX user. Two variables, %uold
6918           and %unew, will be substituted with the old and new usernames,
6919           respectively. The script should return 0 upon successful
6920           completion, and nonzero otherwise.
6921
6922               Note
6923               The script has all responsibility to rename all the necessary
6924               data that is accessible in this posix method. This can mean
6925               different requirements for different backends. The tdbsam and
6926               smbpasswd backends will take care of the contents of their
6927               respective files, so the script is responsible only for
6928               changing the POSIX username, and other data that may required
6929               for your circumstances, such as home directory. Please also
6930               consider whether or not you need to rename the actual home
6931               directories themselves. The ldapsam backend will not make any
6932               changes, because of the potential issues with renaming the LDAP
6933               naming attribute. In this case the script is responsible for
6934               changing the attribute that samba uses (uid) for locating
6935               users, as well as any data that needs to change for other
6936               applications using the same directory.
6937           Default: rename user script =
6938
6939       restrict anonymous (G)
6940
6941           The setting of this parameter determines whether user and group
6942           list information is returned for an anonymous connection. and
6943           mirrors the effects of the
6944
6945               HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\
6946                          Control\LSA\RestrictAnonymous
6947
6948           registry key in Windows 2000 and Windows NT. When set to 0, user
6949           and group list information is returned to anyone who asks. When set
6950           to 1, only an authenticated user can retrieve user and group list
6951           information. For the value 2, supported by Windows 2000/XP and
6952           Samba, no anonymous connections are allowed at all. This can break
6953           third party and Microsoft applications which expect to be allowed
6954           to perform operations anonymously.
6955
6956           The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 1 is dubious,
6957           as user and group list information can be obtained using other
6958           means.
6959
6960               Note
6961               The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is
6962               removed by setting guest ok = yes on any share.
6963           Default: restrict anonymous = 0
6964
6965       root
6966
6967           This parameter is a synonym for root directory.
6968
6969       root dir
6970
6971           This parameter is a synonym for root directory.
6972
6973       root directory (G)
6974
6975           The server will chroot() (i.e. Change its root directory) to this
6976           directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure
6977           operation. Even without it the server will deny access to files not
6978           in one of the service entries. It may also check for, and deny
6979           access to, soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts
6980           to use ".." in file names to access other directories (depending on
6981           the setting of the wide smbconfoptions parameter).
6982
6983           Adding a root directory entry other than "/" adds an extra level of
6984           security, but at a price. It absolutely ensures that no access is
6985           given to files not in the sub-tree specified in the root directory
6986           option, including some files needed for complete operation of the
6987           server. To maintain full operability of the server you will need to
6988           mirror some system files into the root directory tree. In
6989           particular you will need to mirror /etc/passwd (or a subset of it),
6990           and any binaries or configuration files needed for printing (if
6991           required). The set of files that must be mirrored is operating
6992           system dependent.
6993
6994           Default: root directory =
6995
6996           Example: root directory = /homes/smb
6997
6998       samba kcc command (G)
6999
7000           This option specifies the path to the Samba KCC command. This
7001           script is used for replication topology replication.
7002
7003           It should not be necessary to modify this option except for testing
7004           purposes or if the samba_kcc was installed in a non-default
7005           location.
7006
7007           Default: samba kcc command =
7008           /builddir/build/BUILD/samba-4.2.10/source4/scripting/bin/samba_kcc
7009
7010           Example: samba kcc command = /usr/local/bin/kcc
7011
7012       security (G)
7013
7014           This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the
7015           most important settings in the smb.conf file.
7016
7017           The default is security = user, as this is the most common setting,
7018           used for a standalone file server or a DC.
7019
7020           The alternatives are security = ads or security = domain, which
7021           support joining Samba to a Windows domain
7022
7023           You should use security = user and map to guest if you want to
7024           mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This is
7025           commonly used for a shared printer server.
7026
7027           The different settings will now be explained.
7028
7029           SECURITY = AUTO
7030
7031           This is the default security setting in Samba, and causes Samba to
7032           consult the server role parameter (if set) to determine the
7033           security mode.
7034
7035           SECURITY = USER
7036
7037           If server role is not specified, this is the default security
7038           setting in Samba. With user-level security a client must first
7039           "log-on" with a valid username and password (which can be mapped
7040           using the username map parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the
7041           encrypted passwords parameter) can also be used in this security
7042           mode. Parameters such as user and guest only if set are then
7043           applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but
7044           only after the user has been successfully authenticated.
7045
7046           Note that the name of the resource being requested is not sent to
7047           the server until after the server has successfully authenticated
7048           the client. This is why guest shares don´t work in user level
7049           security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown
7050           users into the guest account. See the map to guest parameter for
7051           details on doing this.
7052
7053           SECURITY = DOMAIN
7054
7055           This mode will only work correctly if net(8) has been used to add
7056           this machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the encrypted
7057           passwords parameter to be set to yes. In this mode Samba will try
7058           to validate the username/password by passing it to a Windows NT
7059           Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly the same way that a
7060           Windows NT Server would do.
7061
7062           Note that a valid UNIX user must still exist as well as the account
7063           on the Domain Controller to allow Samba to have a valid UNIX
7064           account to map file access to.
7065
7066           Note that from the client´s point of view security = domain is the
7067           same as security = user. It only affects how the server deals with
7068           the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client
7069           sees.
7070
7071           Note that the name of the resource being requested is not sent to
7072           the server until after the server has successfully authenticated
7073           the client. This is why guest shares don´t work in user level
7074           security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown
7075           users into the guest account. See the map to guest parameter for
7076           details on doing this.
7077
7078           See also the password server parameter and the encrypted passwords
7079           parameter.
7080
7081           Note that the name of the resource being requested is not sent to
7082           the server until after the server has successfully authenticated
7083           the client. This is why guest shares don´t work in user level
7084           security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown
7085           users into the guest account. See the map to guest parameter for
7086           details on doing this.
7087
7088           See also the password server parameter and the encrypted passwords
7089           parameter.
7090
7091           SECURITY = ADS
7092
7093           In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm. To
7094           operate in this mode, the machine running Samba will need to have
7095           Kerberos installed and configured and Samba will need to be joined
7096           to the ADS realm using the net utility.
7097
7098           Note that this mode does NOT make Samba operate as a Active
7099           Directory Domain Controller.
7100
7101           Note that this forces require strong key = yes and client schannel
7102           = yes for the primary domain.
7103
7104           Read the chapter about Domain Membership in the HOWTO for details.
7105
7106           Default: security = AUTO
7107
7108           Example: security = DOMAIN
7109
7110       security mask (S)
7111
7112           This parameter has been removed for Samba 4.0.0.
7113
7114           No default
7115
7116       server role (G)
7117
7118           This option determines the basic operating mode of a Samba server
7119           and is one of the most important settings in the smb.conf file.
7120
7121           The default is server role = auto, as causes Samba to operate
7122           according to the security setting, or if not specified as a simple
7123           file server that is not connected to any domain.
7124
7125           The alternatives are server role = standalone or server role =
7126           member server, which support joining Samba to a Windows domain,
7127           along with server role = domain controller, which run Samba as a
7128           Windows domain controller.
7129
7130           You should use server role = standalone and map to guest if you
7131           want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This
7132           is commonly used for a shared printer server.
7133
7134           SERVER ROLE = AUTO
7135
7136           This is the default server role in Samba, and causes Samba to
7137           consult the security parameter (if set) to determine the server
7138           role, giving compatable behaviours to previous Samba versions.
7139
7140           SERVER ROLE = STANDALONE
7141
7142           If security is also not specified, this is the default security
7143           setting in Samba. In standalone operation, a client must first
7144           "log-on" with a valid username and password (which can be mapped
7145           using the username map parameter) stored on this machine. Encrypted
7146           passwords (see the encrypted passwords parameter) are by default
7147           used in this security mode. Parameters such as user and guest only
7148           if set are then applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this
7149           connection, but only after the user has been successfully
7150           authenticated.
7151
7152           SERVER ROLE = MEMBER SERVER
7153
7154           This mode will only work correctly if net(8) has been used to add
7155           this machine into a Windows Domain. It expects the encrypted
7156           passwords parameter to be set to yes. In this mode Samba will try
7157           to validate the username/password by passing it to a Windows or
7158           Samba Domain Controller, in exactly the same way that a Windows
7159           Server would do.
7160
7161           Note that a valid UNIX user must still exist as well as the account
7162           on the Domain Controller to allow Samba to have a valid UNIX
7163           account to map file access to. Winbind can provide this.
7164
7165           SERVER ROLE = CLASSIC PRIMARY DOMAIN CONTROLLER
7166
7167           This mode of operation runs a classic Samba primary domain
7168           controller, providing domain logon services to Windows and Samba
7169           clients of an NT4-like domain. Clients must be joined to the domain
7170           to create a secure, trusted path across the network. There must be
7171           only one PDC per NetBIOS scope (typcially a broadcast network or
7172           clients served by a single WINS server).
7173
7174           SERVER ROLE = NETBIOS BACKUP DOMAIN CONTROLLER
7175
7176           This mode of operation runs a classic Samba backup domain
7177           controller, providing domain logon services to Windows and Samba
7178           clients of an NT4-like domain. As a BDC, this allows multiple Samba
7179           servers to provide redundant logon services to a single NetBIOS
7180           scope.
7181
7182           SERVER ROLE = ACTIVE DIRECTORY DOMAIN CONTROLLER
7183
7184           This mode of operation runs Samba as an active directory domain
7185           controller, providing domain logon services to Windows and Samba
7186           clients of the domain. This role requires special configuration,
7187           see the Samba4 HOWTO
7188
7189           Default: server role = AUTO
7190
7191           Example: server role = DOMAIN CONTROLLER
7192
7193       server schannel (G)
7194
7195           This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of
7196           the netlogon schannel.  server schannel = no does not offer the
7197           schannel, server schannel = auto offers the schannel but does not
7198           enforce it, and server schannel = yes denies access if the client
7199           is not able to speak netlogon schannel. This is only the case for
7200           Windows NT4 before SP4.
7201
7202           Please note that with this set to no, you will have to apply the
7203           WindowsXP WinXP_SignOrSeal.reg registry patch found in the
7204           docs/registry subdirectory of the Samba distribution tarball.
7205
7206           Default: server schannel = auto
7207
7208           Example: server schannel = yes
7209
7210       server signing (G)
7211
7212           This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB1
7213           and SMB2 signing. Possible values are default, auto, mandatory and
7214           disabled.
7215
7216           By default, and when smb signing is set to default, smb signing is
7217           required when server role is active directory domain controller and
7218           disabled otherwise.
7219
7220           When set to auto, SMB1 signing is offered, but not enforced. When
7221           set to mandatory, SMB1 signing is required and if set to disabled,
7222           SMB signing is not offered either.
7223
7224           For the SMB2 protocol, by design, signing cannot be disabled. In
7225           the case where SMB2 is negotiated, if this parameter is set to
7226           disabled, it will be treated as auto. Setting it to mandatory will
7227           still require SMB2 clients to use signing.
7228
7229           Default: server signing = default
7230
7231       smb encrypt (S)
7232
7233           This parameter controls whether a remote client is allowed or
7234           required to use SMB encryption. It has different effects depending
7235           on whether the connection uses SMB1 or SMB2 and newer:
7236
7237           ·   If the connection uses SMB1, then this option controls the use
7238               of a Samba-specific extension to the SMB protocol introduced in
7239               Samba 3.2 that makes use of the Unix extensions.
7240
7241           ·   If the connection uses SMB2 or newer, then this option controls
7242               the use of the SMB-level encryption that is supported in SMB
7243               version 3.0 and above and available in Windows 8 and newer.
7244
7245       This parameter can be set globally and on a per-share bases. Possible
7246       values are off (or disabled), enabled (or auto, or if_required),
7247       desired, and required (or mandatory). A special value is default which
7248       is the implicit default setting of enabled.
7249
7250       Effects for SMB1
7251           The Samba-specific encryption of SMB1 connections is an extension
7252           to the SMB protocol negotiated as part of the UNIX extensions. SMB
7253           encryption uses the GSSAPI (SSPI on Windows) ability to encrypt and
7254           sign every request/response in a SMB protocol stream. When enabled
7255           it provides a secure method of SMB/CIFS communication, similar to
7256           an ssh protected session, but using SMB/CIFS authentication to
7257           negotiate encryption and signing keys. Currently this is only
7258           supported smbclient of by Samba 3.2 and newer, and hopefully soon
7259           Linux CIFSFS and MacOS/X clients. Windows clients do not support
7260           this feature.
7261
7262           This may be set on a per-share basis, but clients may chose to
7263           encrypt the entire session, not just traffic to a specific share.
7264           If this is set to mandatory then all traffic to a share must be
7265           encrypted once the connection has been made to the share. The
7266           server would return "access denied" to all non-encrypted requests
7267           on such a share. Selecting encrypted traffic reduces throughput as
7268           smaller packet sizes must be used (no huge UNIX style read/writes
7269           allowed) as well as the overhead of encrypting and signing all the
7270           data.
7271
7272           If SMB encryption is selected, Windows style SMB signing (see the
7273           server signing option) is no longer necessary, as the GSSAPI flags
7274           use select both signing and sealing of the data.
7275
7276           When set to auto or default, SMB encryption is offered, but not
7277           enforced. When set to mandatory, SMB encryption is required and if
7278           set to disabled, SMB encryption can not be negotiated.
7279
7280       Effects for SMB2
7281           Native SMB transport encryption is available in SMB version 3.0 or
7282           newer. It is only offered by Samba if server max protocol is set to
7283           SMB3 or newer. Clients supporting this type of encryption include
7284           Windows 8 and newer, Windows server 2012 and newer, and smbclient
7285           of Samba 4.1 and newer.
7286
7287           The protocol implementation offers various options:
7288
7289           ·   The capability to perform SMB encryption can be negotiated
7290               during protocol negotiation.
7291
7292           ·   Data encryption can be enabled globally. In that case, an
7293               encryption-capable connection will have all traffic in all its
7294               sessions encrypted. In particular all share connections will be
7295               encrypted.
7296
7297           ·   Data encryption can also be enabled per share if not enabled
7298               globally. For an encryption-capable connection, all connections
7299               to an encryption-enabled share will be encrypted.
7300
7301           ·   Encryption can be enforced. This means that session setups will
7302               be denied on non-encryption-capable connections if data
7303               encryption has been enabled globally. And tree connections will
7304               be denied for non-encryption capable connections to shares with
7305               data encryption enabled.
7306
7307       These features can be crontrolled with settings of smb encrypt as
7308       follows:
7309
7310       ·   Leaving it as default, explicitly setting default, or setting it to
7311           enabled globally will enable negotiation of encryption but will not
7312           turn on data encryption globally or per share.
7313
7314       ·   Setting it to desired globally will enable negotiation and will
7315           turn on data encryption on sessions and share connections for those
7316           clients that support it.
7317
7318       ·   Setting it to required globally will enable negotiation and turn on
7319           data encryption on sessions and share connections. Clients that do
7320           not support encryption will be denied access to the server.
7321
7322       ·   Setting it to off globally will completely disable the encryption
7323           feature.
7324
7325       ·   Setting it to desired on a share will turn on data encryption for
7326           this share for clients that support encryption if negotiation has
7327           been enabled globally.
7328
7329       ·   Setting it to required on a share will enforce data encryption for
7330           this share if negotiation has been enabled globally. I.e. clients
7331           that do not support encryption will be denied access to the share.
7332
7333           Note that this allows per-share enforcing to be controlled in Samba
7334           differently from Windows: In Windows, RejectUnencryptedAccess is a
7335           global setting, and if it is set, all shares with data encryption
7336           turned on are automatically enforcing encryption. In order to
7337           achieve the same effect in Samba, one has to globally set smb
7338           encrypt to enabled, and then set all shares that should be
7339           encrypted to required. Additionally, it is possible in Samba to
7340           have some shares with encryption required and some other shares
7341           with encryption only desired, which is not possible in Windows.
7342
7343       ·   Setting it to off or enabled for a share has no effect.
7344
7345
7346       Default: smb encrypt = default
7347
7348       smb passwd file (G)
7349
7350           This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By
7351           default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba.
7352
7353           An example of use is:
7354
7355               smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd
7356
7357           Default: smb passwd file = /var/lib/samba/private/smbpasswd
7358
7359       tls cafile (G)
7360
7361           This option can be set to a file (PEM format) containing CA
7362           certificates of root CAs to trust to sign certificates or
7363           intermediate CA certificates.
7364
7365           This path is relative to private dir if the path does not start
7366           with a /.
7367
7368           Default: tls cafile = tls/ca.pem
7369
7370       tls certfile (G)
7371
7372           This option can be set to a file (PEM format) containing the RSA
7373           certificate.
7374
7375           This path is relative to private dir if the path does not start
7376           with a /.
7377
7378           Default: tls certfile = tls/cert.pem
7379
7380       tls crlfile (G)
7381
7382           This option can be set to a file containing a certificate
7383           revocation list (CRL).
7384
7385           This path is relative to private dir if the path does not start
7386           with a /.
7387
7388           Default: tls crlfile =
7389
7390       tls dh params file (G)
7391
7392           This option can be set to a file with Diffie-Hellman parameters
7393           which will be used with EDH ciphers.
7394
7395           This path is relative to private dir if the path does not start
7396           with a /.
7397
7398           Default: tls dh params file =
7399
7400       tls enabled (G)
7401
7402           If this option is set to yes, then Samba will use TLS when possible
7403           in communication.
7404
7405           Default: tls enabled = yes
7406
7407       tls keyfile (G)
7408
7409           This option can be set to a file (PEM format) containing the RSA
7410           private key. This file must be accessible without a pass-phrase,
7411           i.e. it must not be encrypted.
7412
7413           This path is relative to private dir if the path does not start
7414           with a /.
7415
7416           Default: tls keyfile = tls/key.pem
7417
7418       tls priority (G)
7419
7420           This option can be set to a string describing the TLS protocols to
7421           be supported in the parts of Samba that use GnuTLS, specifically
7422           the AD DC.
7423
7424           The default turns off SSLv3, as this protocol is no longer
7425           considered secure after CVE-2014-3566 (otherwise known as POODLE)
7426           impacted SSLv3 use in HTTPS applications.
7427
7428           The valid options are described in the GNUTLS Priority-Strings
7429           documentation at
7430           http://gnutls.org/manual/html_node/Priority-Strings.html
7431
7432           Default: tls priority = NORMAL:-VERS-SSL3.0
7433
7434       tls verify peer (G)
7435
7436           This controls if and how strict the client will verify the peer´s
7437           certificate and name. Possible values are (in increasing order):
7438           no_check, ca_only, ca_and_name_if_available, ca_and_name and
7439           as_strict_as_possible.
7440
7441           When set to no_check the certificate is not verified at all, which
7442           allows trivial man in the middle attacks.
7443
7444           When set to ca_only the certificate is verified to be signed from a
7445           ca specified in the tls ca file option. Setting tls ca file to a
7446           valid file is required. The certificate lifetime is also verified.
7447           If the tls crl file option is configured, the certificate is also
7448           verified against the ca crl.
7449
7450           When set to ca_and_name_if_available all checks from ca_only are
7451           performed. In addition, the peer hostname is verified against the
7452           certificate´s name, if it is provided by the application layer and
7453           not given as an ip address string.
7454
7455           When set to ca_and_name all checks from ca_and_name_if_available
7456           are performed. In addition the peer hostname needs to be provided
7457           and even an ip address is checked against the certificate´s name.
7458
7459           When set to as_strict_as_possible all checks from ca_and_name are
7460           performed. In addition the tls crl file needs to be configured.
7461           Future versions of Samba may implement additional checks.
7462
7463           Default: tls verify peer = as_strict_as_possible
7464
7465       unix password sync (G)
7466
7467           This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to
7468           synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the
7469           encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. If this is
7470           set to yes the program specified in the passwd program parameter is
7471           called AS ROOT - to allow the new UNIX password to be set without
7472           access to the old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code
7473           has no access to the old password cleartext, only the new).
7474
7475           Default: unix password sync = no
7476
7477       user
7478
7479           This parameter is a synonym for username.
7480
7481       users
7482
7483           This parameter is a synonym for username.
7484
7485       username (S)
7486
7487           To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the
7488           valid users parameter.
7489
7490           This parameter is deprecated
7491
7492           However, it currently operates only in conjunction with only user.
7493           The supported way to restrict a service to a particular set of
7494           users is the valid users parameter.
7495
7496           Default: username =  # The guest account if a guest service, else
7497           <empty string>.
7498
7499           Example: username = fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup
7500
7501       username level (G)
7502
7503           This option helps Samba to try and ´guess´ at the real UNIX
7504           username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username. By
7505           default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with
7506           the first letter capitalized, and fails if the username is not
7507           found on the UNIX machine.
7508
7509           If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes. This
7510           parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase
7511           combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name.
7512           The higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the
7513           slower the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when
7514           you have strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as
7515           AstrangeUser .
7516
7517           This parameter is needed only on UNIX systems that have case
7518           sensitive usernames.
7519
7520           Default: username level = 0
7521
7522           Example: username level = 5
7523
7524       username map (G)
7525
7526           This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of
7527           usernames from the clients to the server. This can be used for
7528           several purposes. The most common is to map usernames that users
7529           use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses. The
7530           other is to map multiple users to a single username so that they
7531           can more easily share files.
7532
7533           Please note that for user mode security, the username map is
7534           applied prior to validating the user credentials. Domain member
7535           servers (domain or ads) apply the username map after the user has
7536           been successfully authenticated by the domain controller and
7537           require fully qualified entries in the map table (e.g. biddle =
7538           DOMAIN\foo).
7539
7540           The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should contain a
7541           single UNIX username on the left then a ´=´ followed by a list of
7542           usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the right may
7543           contain names of the form @group in which case they will match any
7544           UNIX username in that group. The special client name ´*´ is a
7545           wildcard and matches any name. Each line of the map file may be up
7546           to 1023 characters long.
7547
7548           The file is processed on each line by taking the supplied username
7549           and comparing it with each username on the right hand side of the
7550           ´=´ signs. If the supplied name matches any of the names on the
7551           right hand side then it is replaced with the name on the left.
7552           Processing then continues with the next line.
7553
7554           If any line begins with a ´#´ or a ´;´ then it is ignored.
7555
7556           If any line begins with an ´!´ then the processing will stop after
7557           that line if a mapping was done by the line. Otherwise mapping
7558           continues with every line being processed. Using ´!´ is most useful
7559           when you have a wildcard mapping line later in the file.
7560
7561           For example to map from the name admin or administrator to the UNIX
7562           name
7563            root you would use:
7564
7565               root = admin administrator
7566
7567           Or to map anyone in the UNIX group system to the UNIX name sys you
7568           would use:
7569
7570               sys = @system
7571
7572           You can have as many mappings as you like in a username map file.
7573
7574           If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then the netgroup
7575           database is checked before the /etc/group database for matching
7576           groups.
7577
7578           You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them by using
7579           double quotes around the name. For example:
7580
7581               tridge = "Andrew Tridgell"
7582
7583           would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the unix
7584           username "tridge".
7585
7586           The following example would map mary and fred to the unix user sys,
7587           and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the ´!´ to tell Samba to
7588           stop processing if it gets a match on that line:
7589
7590               !sys = mary fred
7591               guest = *
7592
7593           Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of usernames.
7594           Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and fred is remapped to mary
7595           then you will actually be connecting to \\server\mary and will need
7596           to supply a password suitable for mary not fred. The only exception
7597           to this is the username passed to a Domain Controller (if you have
7598           one). The DC will receive whatever username the client supplies
7599           without modification.
7600
7601           Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect this has
7602           is with printing. Users who have been mapped may have trouble
7603           deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they
7604           don´t own the print job.
7605
7606           Samba versions prior to 3.0.8 would only support reading the fully
7607           qualified username (e.g.: DOMAIN\user) from the username map when
7608           performing a kerberos login from a client. However, when looking up
7609           a map entry for a user authenticated by NTLM[SSP], only the login
7610           name would be used for matches. This resulted in inconsistent
7611           behavior sometimes even on the same server.
7612
7613           The following functionality is obeyed in version 3.0.8 and later:
7614
7615           When performing local authentication, the username map is applied
7616           to the login name before attempting to authenticate the connection.
7617
7618           When relying upon a external domain controller for validating
7619           authentication requests, smbd will apply the username map to the
7620           fully qualified username (i.e.  DOMAIN\user) only after the user
7621           has been successfully authenticated.
7622
7623           An example of use is:
7624
7625               username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map
7626
7627           Default: username map =  # no username map
7628
7629       username map cache time (G)
7630
7631           Mapping usernames with the username map or username map script
7632           features of Samba can be relatively expensive. During login of a
7633           user, the mapping is done several times. In particular, calling the
7634           username map script can slow down logins if external databases have
7635           to be queried from the script being called.
7636
7637           The parameter username map cache time controls a mapping cache. It
7638           specifies the number of seconds a mapping from the username map
7639           file or script is to be efficiently cached. The default of 0 means
7640           no caching is done.
7641
7642           Default: username map cache time = 0
7643
7644           Example: username map cache time = 60
7645
7646       username map script (G)
7647
7648           This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the username map
7649           parameter. This parameter specifies and external program or script
7650           that must accept a single command line option (the username
7651           transmitted in the authentication request) and return a line on
7652           standard output (the name to which the account should mapped). In
7653           this way, it is possible to store username map tables in an LDAP or
7654           NIS directory services.
7655
7656           Default: username map script =
7657
7658           Example: username map script = /etc/samba/scripts/mapusers.sh
7659
7660       valid users (S)
7661
7662           This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this
7663           service. Names starting with ´@´, ´+´ and ´&´ are interpreted using
7664           the same rules as described in the invalid users parameter.
7665
7666           If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. If a
7667           username is in both this list and the invalid users list then
7668           access is denied for that user.
7669
7670           The current servicename is substituted for %S. This is useful in
7671           the [homes] section.
7672
7673           Note: When used in the [global] section this parameter may have
7674           unwanted side effects. For example: If samba is configured as a
7675           MASTER BROWSER (see local master, os level, domain master,
7676           preferred master) this option will prevent workstations from being
7677           able to browse the network.
7678
7679           Default: valid users =  # No valid users list (anyone can login)
7680
7681           Example: valid users = greg, @pcusers
7682
7683       writable
7684
7685           This parameter is a synonym for writeable.
7686
7687       writeable (S)
7688
7689           Inverted synonym for read only.
7690
7691           Default: writeable = no
7692
7693       write list (S)
7694
7695           This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a
7696           service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be
7697           given write access, no matter what the read only option is set to.
7698           The list can include group names using the @group syntax.
7699
7700           Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list
7701           then they will be given write access.
7702
7703           Default: write list =
7704
7705           Example: write list = admin, root, @staff
7706
7707       aio read size (S)
7708
7709           If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this
7710           integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will read from
7711           file asynchronously when size of request is bigger than this value.
7712           Note that it happens only for non-chained and non-chaining reads
7713           and when not using write cache.
7714
7715           Current implementation of asynchronous I/O in Samba 3.0 does
7716           support only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and
7717           write combined.
7718
7719           Related command: write cache size
7720
7721           Related command: aio write size
7722
7723           Default: aio read size = 0
7724
7725           Example: aio read size = 16384 # Use asynchronous I/O for reads
7726           bigger than 16KB request size
7727
7728       aio write behind (S)
7729
7730           If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support, Samba will
7731           not wait until write requests are finished before returning the
7732           result to the client for files listed in this parameter. Instead,
7733           Samba will immediately return that the write request has been
7734           finished successfully, no matter if the operation will succeed or
7735           not. This might speed up clients without aio support, but is really
7736           dangerous, because data could be lost and files could be damaged.
7737
7738           The syntax is identical to the veto files parameter.
7739
7740           Default: aio write behind =
7741
7742           Example: aio write behind = /*.tmp/
7743
7744       aio write size (S)
7745
7746           If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this
7747           integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will write to
7748           file asynchronously when size of request is bigger than this value.
7749           Note that it happens only for non-chained and non-chaining reads
7750           and when not using write cache.
7751
7752           Current implementation of asynchronous I/O in Samba 3.0 does
7753           support only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and
7754           write combined.
7755
7756           Related command: write cache size
7757
7758           Related command: aio read size
7759
7760           Default: aio write size = 0
7761
7762           Example: aio write size = 16384 # Use asynchronous I/O for writes
7763           bigger than 16KB request size
7764
7765       allocation roundup size (S)
7766
7767           This parameter allows an administrator to tune the allocation size
7768           reported to Windows clients. The default size of 1Mb generally
7769           results in improved Windows client performance. However, rounding
7770           the allocation size may cause difficulties for some applications,
7771           e.g. MS Visual Studio. If the MS Visual Studio compiler starts to
7772           crash with an internal error, set this parameter to zero for this
7773           share.
7774
7775           The integer parameter specifies the roundup size in bytes.
7776
7777           Default: allocation roundup size = 1048576
7778
7779           Example: allocation roundup size = 0 # (to disable roundups)
7780
7781       block size (S)
7782
7783           This parameter controls the behavior of smbd(8) when reporting disk
7784           free sizes. By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024
7785           bytes.
7786
7787           Changing this parameter may have some effect on the efficiency of
7788           client writes, this is not yet confirmed. This parameter was added
7789           to allow advanced administrators to change it (usually to a higher
7790           value) and test the effect it has on client write performance
7791           without re-compiling the code. As this is an experimental option it
7792           may be removed in a future release.
7793
7794           Changing this option does not change the disk free reporting size,
7795           just the block size unit reported to the client.
7796
7797           Default: block size = 1024
7798
7799           Example: block size = 4096
7800
7801       deadtime (G)
7802
7803           The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the
7804           number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered
7805           dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes effect if the
7806           number of open files is zero.
7807
7808           This is useful to stop a server´s resources being exhausted by a
7809           large number of inactive connections.
7810
7811           Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a connection is
7812           broken so in most cases this parameter should be transparent to
7813           users.
7814
7815           Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes is recommended
7816           for most systems.
7817
7818           A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection should be
7819           performed.
7820
7821           Default: deadtime = 0
7822
7823           Example: deadtime = 15
7824
7825       getwd cache (G)
7826
7827           This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a caching algorithm
7828           will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls. This can
7829           have a significant impact on performance, especially when the wide
7830           smbconfoptions parameter is set to no.
7831
7832           Default: getwd cache = yes
7833
7834       hostname lookups (G)
7835
7836           Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) hostname lookups or
7837           use the ip addresses instead. An example place where hostname
7838           lookups are currently used is when checking the hosts deny and
7839           hosts allow.
7840
7841           Default: hostname lookups = no
7842
7843           Example: hostname lookups = yes
7844
7845       keepalive (G)
7846
7847           The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of
7848           seconds between keepalive packets. If this parameter is zero, no
7849           keepalive packets will be sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow
7850           the server to tell whether a client is still present and
7851           responding.
7852
7853           Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket has the
7854           SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it by default. (see socket options).
7855           Basically you should only use this option if you strike
7856           difficulties.
7857
7858           Please note this option only applies to SMB1 client connections,
7859           and has no effect on SMB2 clients.
7860
7861           Default: keepalive = 300
7862
7863           Example: keepalive = 600
7864
7865       max connections (S)
7866
7867           This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a
7868           service to be limited. If max connections is greater than 0 then
7869           connections will be refused if this number of connections to the
7870           service are already open. A value of zero mean an unlimited number
7871           of connections may be made.
7872
7873           Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock
7874           files will be stored in the directory specified by the lock
7875           directory option.
7876
7877           Default: max connections = 0
7878
7879           Example: max connections = 10
7880
7881       max disk size (G)
7882
7883           This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size
7884           of disks. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear
7885           to be not larger than 100 MB in size.
7886
7887           Note that this option does not limit the amount of data you can put
7888           on the disk. In the above case you could still store much more than
7889           100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks for the amount of
7890           free disk space or the total disk size then the result will be
7891           bounded by the amount specified in max disk size.
7892
7893           This option is primarily useful to work around bugs in some pieces
7894           of software that can´t handle very large disks, particularly disks
7895           over 1GB in size.
7896
7897           A max disk size of 0 means no limit.
7898
7899           Default: max disk size = 0
7900
7901           Example: max disk size = 1000
7902
7903       max open files (G)
7904
7905           This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one
7906           smbd(8) file serving process may have open for a client at any one
7907           time. This parameter can be set very high (16384) as Samba uses
7908           only one bit per unopened file. Setting this parameter lower than
7909           16384 will cause Samba to complain and set this value back to the
7910           minimum of 16384, as Windows 7 depends on this number of open file
7911           handles being available.
7912
7913           The limit of the number of open files is usually set by the UNIX
7914           per-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter so you
7915           should never need to touch this parameter.
7916
7917           Default: max open files = 16384
7918
7919       max smbd processes (G)
7920
7921           This parameter limits the maximum number of smbd(8) processes
7922           concurrently running on a system and is intended as a stopgap to
7923           prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server
7924           has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of
7925           connections. Remember that under normal operating conditions, each
7926           user will have an smbd(8) associated with him or her to handle
7927           connections to all shares from a given host.
7928
7929           Default: max smbd processes = 0
7930
7931           Example: max smbd processes = 1000
7932
7933       min print space (S)
7934
7935           This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be
7936           available before a user will be able to spool a print job. It is
7937           specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which means a user can
7938           always spool a print job.
7939
7940           Default: min print space = 0
7941
7942           Example: min print space = 2000
7943
7944       name cache timeout (G)
7945
7946           Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba´s
7947           hostname resolve cache time out. If the timeout is set to 0. the
7948           caching is disabled.
7949
7950           Default: name cache timeout = 660
7951
7952           Example: name cache timeout = 0
7953
7954       socket options (G)
7955
7956               Warning
7957               Modern server operating systems are tuned for high network
7958               performance in the majority of situations; when you set socket
7959               options you are overriding those settings. Linux in particular
7960               has an auto-tuning mechanism for buffer sizes that will be
7961               disabled if you specify a socket buffer size. This can
7962               potentially cripple your TCP/IP stack.
7963
7964               Getting the socket options correct can make a big difference to
7965               your performance, but getting them wrong can degrade it by just
7966               as much. As with any other low level setting, if you must make
7967               changes to it, make small changes and test the effect before
7968               making any large changes.
7969
7970           This option allows you to set socket options to be used when
7971           talking with the client.
7972
7973           Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the
7974           operating systems which allow the connection to be tuned.
7975
7976           This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server for
7977           optimal performance for your local network. There is no way that
7978           Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for your net, so you
7979           must experiment and choose them yourself. We strongly suggest you
7980           read the appropriate documentation for your operating system first
7981           (perhaps man setsockopt will help).
7982
7983           You may find that on some systems Samba will say "Unknown socket
7984           option" when you supply an option. This means you either
7985           incorrectly typed it or you need to add an include file to
7986           includes.h for your OS. If the latter is the case please send the
7987           patch to samba-technical@samba.org.
7988
7989           Any of the supported socket options may be combined in any way you
7990           like, as long as your OS allows it.
7991
7992           This is the list of socket options currently settable using this
7993           option:
7994
7995           ·   SO_KEEPALIVE
7996
7997           ·   SO_REUSEADDR
7998
7999           ·   SO_BROADCAST
8000
8001           ·   TCP_NODELAY
8002
8003           ·   IPTOS_LOWDELAY
8004
8005           ·   IPTOS_THROUGHPUT
8006
8007           ·   SO_SNDBUF *
8008
8009           ·   SO_RCVBUF *
8010
8011           ·   SO_SNDLOWAT *
8012
8013           ·   SO_RCVLOWAT *
8014
8015       Those marked with a ´*´ take an integer argument. The others can
8016       optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by
8017       default they will be enabled if you don´t specify 1 or 0.
8018
8019       To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE for example
8020       SO_SNDBUF = 8192. Note that you must not have any spaces before or
8021       after the = sign.
8022
8023       If you are on a local network then a sensible option might be:
8024
8025       socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY
8026
8027       If you have a local network then you could try:
8028
8029       socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY
8030
8031       If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try setting
8032       IPTOS_THROUGHPUT.
8033
8034       Note that several of the options may cause your Samba server to fail
8035       completely. Use these options with caution!
8036
8037       Default: socket options = TCP_NODELAY
8038
8039       Example: socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY
8040
8041       strict allocate (S)
8042
8043           This is a boolean that controls the handling of disk space
8044           allocation in the server. When this is set to yes the server will
8045           change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real disk storage
8046           blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour of actually
8047           forcing the disk system to allocate real storage blocks when a file
8048           is created or extended to be a given size. In UNIX terminology this
8049           means that Samba will stop creating sparse files.
8050
8051           This option is really designed for file systems that support fast
8052           allocation of large numbers of blocks such as extent-based file
8053           systems. On file systems that don´t support extents (most notably
8054           ext3) this can make Samba slower. When you work with large files
8055           over >100MB on file systems without extents you may even run into
8056           problems with clients running into timeouts.
8057
8058           When you have an extent based filesystem it´s likely that we can
8059           make use of unwritten extents which allows Samba to allocate even
8060           large amounts of space very fast and you will not see any timeout
8061           problems caused by strict allocate. With strict allocate in use you
8062           will also get much better out of quota messages in case you use
8063           quotas. Another advantage of activating this setting is that it
8064           will help to reduce file fragmentation.
8065
8066           To give you an idea on which filesystems this setting might
8067           currently be a good option for you: XFS, ext4, btrfs, ocfs2 on
8068           Linux and JFS2 on AIX support unwritten extents. On Filesystems
8069           that do not support it, preallocation is probably an expensive
8070           operation where you will see reduced performance and risk to let
8071           clients run into timeouts when creating large files. Examples are
8072           ext3, ZFS, HFS+ and most others, so be aware if you activate this
8073           setting on those filesystems.
8074
8075           Default: strict allocate = no
8076
8077       strict rename (S)
8078
8079           By default a Windows SMB server prevents directory renames when
8080           there are open file or directory handles below it in the filesystem
8081           hierarchy. Historically Samba has always allowed this as POSIX
8082           filesystem semantics require it.
8083
8084           This boolean parameter allows Samba to match the Windows behavior.
8085           Setting this to "yes" is a very expensive change, as it forces
8086           Samba to travers the entire open file handle database on every
8087           directory rename request. In a clustered Samba system the cost is
8088           even greater than the non-clustered case.
8089
8090           For this reason the default is "no", and it is recommended to be
8091           left that way unless a specific Windows application requires it to
8092           be changed.
8093
8094           Default: strict rename = no
8095
8096       strict sync (S)
8097
8098           Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell)
8099           seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync
8100           to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended
8101           until the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in kernel
8102           disk buffers has been safely stored onto stable storage. This is
8103           very slow and should only be done rarely. Setting this parameter to
8104           no (the default) means that smbd(8) ignores the Windows
8105           applications requests for a sync call. There is only a possibility
8106           of losing data if the operating system itself that Samba is running
8107           on crashes, so there is little danger in this default setting. In
8108           addition, this fixes many performance problems that people have
8109           reported with the new Windows98 explorer shell file copies.
8110
8111           Default: strict sync = no
8112
8113       sync always (S)
8114
8115           This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will
8116           always be written to stable storage before the write call returns.
8117           If this is no then the server will be guided by the client´s
8118           request in each write call (clients can set a bit indicating that a
8119           particular write should be synchronous). If this is yes then every
8120           write will be followed by a fsync() call to ensure the data is
8121           written to disk. Note that the strict sync parameter must be set to
8122           yes in order for this parameter to have any effect.
8123
8124           Default: sync always = no
8125
8126       use mmap (G)
8127
8128           This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can
8129           depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba
8130           requires a coherent mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently
8131           only HPUX does not have such a coherent cache, and so this
8132           parameter is set to no by default on HPUX. On all other systems
8133           this parameter should be left alone. This parameter is provided to
8134           help the Samba developers track down problems with the tdb internal
8135           code.
8136
8137           Default: use mmap = yes
8138
8139       use ntdb (G)
8140
8141           Beginning in Samba 4.1, a growing number of databases can use the
8142           NTDB format rather than TDB.
8143
8144           If you enable this option these databases will default to a .ntdb
8145           extension rather than .tdb. If the .tdb file exists, it will
8146           automatically be converted to NTDB and renamed to .tdb.bak.
8147
8148           Filenames explicitly specified in smb.conf will be respected (i.e.
8149           the format will depend on the .ntdb or .tdb extension).
8150
8151           Default: use ntdb = no
8152
8153       use sendfile (S)
8154
8155           If this parameter is yes, and the sendfile() system call is
8156           supported by the underlying operating system, then some SMB read
8157           calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient
8158           sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked. This
8159           may make more efficient use of the system CPU´s and cause Samba to
8160           be faster. Samba automatically turns this off for clients that use
8161           protocol levels lower than NT LM 0.12 and when it detects a client
8162           is Windows 9x (using sendfile from Linux will cause these clients
8163           to fail).
8164
8165           Default: use sendfile = no
8166
8167       write cache size (S)
8168
8169           If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will
8170           create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does not do
8171           this for non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not
8172           request to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache
8173           if possible. The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in
8174           whose offset would not fit into the cache or when the file is
8175           closed by the client. Reads for the file are also served from this
8176           cache if the data is stored within it.
8177
8178           This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more
8179           efficient write size for RAID disks (i.e. writes may be tuned to be
8180           the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems where
8181           the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free memory for
8182           userspace programs.
8183
8184           The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache (per
8185           oplocked file) in bytes.
8186
8187           Note that the write cache won´t be used for file handles with a
8188           smb2 write lease.
8189
8190           Default: write cache size = 0
8191
8192           Example: write cache size = 262144 # for a 256k cache size per file
8193
8194       get quota command (G)
8195
8196           The get quota command should only be used whenever there is no
8197           operating system API available from the OS that samba can use.
8198
8199           This option is only available Samba was compiled with quotas
8200           support.
8201
8202           This parameter should specify the path to a script that queries the
8203           quota information for the specified user/group for the partition
8204           that the specified directory is on.
8205
8206           Such a script is being given 3 arguments:
8207
8208           ·   directory
8209
8210           ·   type of query
8211
8212           ·   uid of user or gid of group
8213
8214       The directory is actually mostly just "." - It needs to be treated
8215       relatively to the current working directory that the script can also
8216       query.
8217
8218       The type of query can be one of:
8219
8220       ·   1 - user quotas
8221
8222       ·   2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)
8223
8224       ·   3 - group quotas
8225
8226       ·   4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)
8227
8228       This script should print one line as output with spaces between the
8229       columns. The printed columns should be:
8230
8231       ·   1 - quota flags (0 = no quotas, 1 = quotas enabled, 2 = quotas
8232           enabled and enforced)
8233
8234       ·   2 - number of currently used blocks
8235
8236       ·   3 - the softlimit number of blocks
8237
8238       ·   4 - the hardlimit number of blocks
8239
8240       ·   5 - currently used number of inodes
8241
8242       ·   6 - the softlimit number of inodes
8243
8244       ·   7 - the hardlimit number of inodes
8245
8246       ·   8 (optional) - the number of bytes in a block(default is 1024)
8247
8248       Default: get quota command =
8249
8250       Example: get quota command = /usr/local/sbin/query_quota
8251
8252       host msdfs (G)
8253
8254           If set to yes, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware
8255           clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server.
8256
8257           See also the msdfs root share level parameter. For more information
8258           on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSFDS chapter in
8259           the book Samba3-HOWTO.
8260
8261           Default: host msdfs = yes
8262
8263       msdfs proxy (S)
8264
8265           This parameter indicates that the share is a stand-in for another
8266           CIFS share whose location is specified by the value of the
8267           parameter. When clients attempt to connect to this share, they are
8268           redirected to one or multiple, comma separated proxied shares using
8269           the SMB-Dfs protocol.
8270
8271           Only Dfs roots can act as proxy shares. Take a look at the msdfs
8272           root and host msdfs options to find out how to set up a Dfs root
8273           share.
8274
8275           No default
8276
8277           Example: msdfs proxy =
8278           \otherserver\someshare,\otherserver2\someshare
8279
8280       msdfs root (S)
8281
8282           If set to yes, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows
8283           clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the
8284           share directory. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by
8285           symbolic links of the form msdfs:serverA\\shareA,serverB\\shareB
8286           and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba,
8287           refer to the MSDFS chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO book.
8288
8289           Default: msdfs root = no
8290
8291       ntvfs handler (S)
8292
8293           This specifies the NTVFS handlers for this share.
8294
8295           ·   posix: Maps POSIX FS semantics to NT semantics
8296
8297           ·   unixuid: Sets up user credentials based on POSIX gid/uid.
8298
8299           ·   cifs: Proxies a remote CIFS FS. Mainly useful for testing.
8300
8301           ·   nbench: Filter module that saves data useful to the nbench
8302               benchmark suite.
8303
8304           ·   ipc: Allows using SMB for inter process communication. Only
8305               used for the IPC$ share.
8306
8307           ·   posix: Maps POSIX FS semantics to NT semantics
8308
8309           ·   print: Allows printing over SMB. This is LANMAN-style printing,
8310               not the be confused with the spoolss DCE/RPC interface used by
8311               later versions of Windows.
8312
8313       Note that this option is only used when the NTVFS file server is in
8314       use. It is not used with the (default) s3fs file server.
8315
8316       Default: ntvfs handler = unixuid, default
8317
8318       set quota command (G)
8319
8320           The set quota command should only be used whenever there is no
8321           operating system API available from the OS that samba can use.
8322
8323           This option is only available if Samba was compiled with quota
8324           support.
8325
8326           This parameter should specify the path to a script that can set
8327           quota for the specified arguments.
8328
8329           The specified script should take the following arguments:
8330
8331           ·   1 - path to where the quota needs to be set. This needs to be
8332               interpreted relative to the current working directory that the
8333               script may also check for.
8334
8335           ·   2 - quota type
8336
8337               ·   1 - user quotas
8338
8339               ·   2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)
8340
8341               ·   3 - group quotas
8342
8343               ·   4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)
8344
8345
8346       ·   3 - id (uid for user, gid for group, -1 if N/A)
8347
8348       ·   4 - quota state (0 = disable, 1 = enable, 2 = enable and enforce)
8349
8350       ·   5 - block softlimit
8351
8352       ·   6 - block hardlimit
8353
8354       ·   7 - inode softlimit
8355
8356       ·   8 - inode hardlimit
8357
8358       ·   9(optional) - block size, defaults to 1024
8359
8360       The script should output at least one line of data on success. And
8361       nothing on failure.
8362
8363       Default: set quota command =
8364
8365       Example: set quota command = /usr/local/sbin/set_quota
8366
8367       vfs object
8368
8369           This parameter is a synonym for vfs objects.
8370
8371       vfs objects (S)
8372
8373           This parameter specifies the backend names which are used for Samba
8374           VFS I/O operations. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used
8375           but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects.
8376
8377           Default: vfs objects =
8378
8379           Example: vfs objects = extd_audit recycle
8380
8381       create krb5 conf (G)
8382
8383           Setting this parameter to no prevents winbind from creating custom
8384           krb5.conf files. Winbind normally does this because the krb5
8385           libraries are not AD-site-aware and thus would pick any domain
8386           controller out of potentially very many. Winbind is site-aware and
8387           makes the krb5 libraries use a local DC by creating its own
8388           krb5.conf files.
8389
8390           Preventing winbind from doing this might become necessary if you
8391           have to add special options into your system-krb5.conf that winbind
8392           does not see.
8393
8394           Default: create krb5 conf = yes
8395
8396       idmap backend (G)
8397
8398           The idmap backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use
8399           varying backends to store SID/uid/gid mapping tables.
8400
8401           This option specifies the default backend that is used when no
8402           special configuration set, but it is now deprecated in favour of
8403           the new spelling idmap config * : backend.
8404
8405           Default: idmap backend = tdb
8406
8407       idmap cache time (G)
8408
8409           This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind´s idmap
8410           interface will cache positive SID/uid/gid query results. By
8411           default, Samba will cache these results for one week.
8412
8413           Default: idmap cache time = 604800
8414
8415       idmap config:OPTION (G)
8416
8417           ID mapping in Samba is the mapping between Windows SIDs and Unix
8418           user and group IDs. This is performed by Winbindd with a
8419           configurable plugin interface. Samba´s ID mapping is configured by
8420           options starting with the idmap config prefix. An idmap option
8421           consists of the idmap config prefix, followed by a domain name or
8422           the asterisk character (*), a colon, and the name of an idmap
8423           setting for the chosen domain.
8424
8425           The idmap configuration is hence divided into groups, one group for
8426           each domain to be configured, and one group with the asterisk
8427           instead of a proper domain name, which specifies the default
8428           configuration that is used to catch all domains that do not have an
8429           explicit idmap configuration of their own.
8430
8431           There are three general options available:
8432
8433           backend = backend_name
8434               This specifies the name of the idmap plugin to use as the
8435               SID/uid/gid backend for this domain. The standard backends are
8436               tdb (idmap_tdb(8)), tdb2 (idmap_tdb2(8)), ldap (idmap_ldap(8)),
8437               rid (idmap_rid(8)), hash (idmap_hash(8)), autorid
8438               (idmap_autorid(8)), ad (idmap_ad(8)) and nss (idmap_nss(8)).
8439               The corresponding manual pages contain the details, but here is
8440               a summary.
8441
8442               The first three of these create mappings of their own using
8443               internal unixid counters and store the mappings in a database.
8444               These are suitable for use in the default idmap configuration.
8445               The rid and hash backends use a pure algorithmic calculation to
8446               determine the unixid for a SID. The autorid module is a mixture
8447               of the tdb and rid backend. It creates ranges for each domain
8448               encountered and then uses the rid algorithm for each of these
8449               automatically configured domains individually. The ad backend
8450               uses unix ids stored in Active Directory via the standard
8451               schema extensions. The nss backend reverses the standard
8452               winbindd setup and gets the unix ids via names from nsswitch
8453               which can be useful in an ldap setup.
8454
8455           range = low - high
8456               Defines the available matching uid and gid range for which the
8457               backend is authoritative. For allocating backends, this also
8458               defines the start and the end of the range for allocating new
8459               unique IDs.
8460
8461               winbind uses this parameter to find the backend that is
8462               authoritative for a unix ID to SID mapping, so it must be set
8463               for each individually configured domain and for the default
8464               configuration. The configured ranges must be mutually disjoint.
8465
8466           read only = yes|no
8467               This option can be used to turn the writing backends tdb, tdb2,
8468               and ldap into read only mode. This can be useful e.g. in cases
8469               where a pre-filled database exists that should not be extended
8470               automatically.
8471
8472           The following example illustrates how to configure the idmap_ad(8)
8473           backend for the CORP domain and the idmap_tdb(8) backend for all
8474           other domains. This configuration assumes that the admin of CORP
8475           assigns unix ids below 1000000 via the SFU extensions, and winbind
8476           is supposed to use the next million entries for its own mappings
8477           from trusted domains and for local groups for example.
8478
8479                    idmap config * : backend = tdb
8480                    idmap config * : range = 1000000-1999999
8481
8482                    idmap config CORP : backend  = ad
8483                    idmap config CORP : range = 1000-999999
8484
8485
8486           No default
8487
8488       winbind gid
8489
8490           This parameter is a synonym for idmap gid.
8491
8492       idmap gid (G)
8493
8494           The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids for the
8495           default idmap configuration. It is now deprecated in favour of
8496           idmap config * : range.
8497
8498           See the idmap config option.
8499
8500           Default: idmap gid =
8501
8502           Example: idmap gid = 10000-20000
8503
8504       idmap negative cache time (G)
8505
8506           This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind´s idmap
8507           interface will cache negative SID/uid/gid query results.
8508
8509           Default: idmap negative cache time = 120
8510
8511       winbind uid
8512
8513           This parameter is a synonym for idmap uid.
8514
8515       idmap uid (G)
8516
8517           The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids for the
8518           default idmap configuration. It is now deprecated in favour of
8519           idmap config * : range.
8520
8521           See the idmap config option.
8522
8523           Default: idmap uid =
8524
8525           Example: idmap uid = 10000-20000
8526
8527       neutralize nt4 emulation (G)
8528
8529           This option controls whether winbindd sends the
8530           NETLOGON_NEG_NEUTRALIZE_NT4_EMULATION flag in order to bypass the
8531           NT4 emulation of a domain controller.
8532
8533           Typically you should not need set this. It can be useful for
8534           upgrades from NT4 to AD domains.
8535
8536           The behavior can be controlled per netbios domain by using
8537           ´neutralize nt4 emulation:NETBIOSDOMAIN = yes´ as option.
8538
8539           Default: neutralize nt4 emulation = no
8540
8541       reject md5 servers (G)
8542
8543           This option controls whether winbindd requires support for aes
8544           support for the netlogon secure channel.
8545
8546           The following flags will be required NETLOGON_NEG_ARCFOUR,
8547           NETLOGON_NEG_SUPPORTS_AES, NETLOGON_NEG_PASSWORD_SET2 and
8548           NETLOGON_NEG_AUTHENTICATED_RPC.
8549
8550           You can set this to yes if all domain controllers support aes. This
8551           will prevent downgrade attacks.
8552
8553           The behavior can be controlled per netbios domain by using ´reject
8554           md5 servers:NETBIOSDOMAIN = yes´ as option.
8555
8556           This option takes precedence to the require strong key option.
8557
8558           Default: reject md5 servers = no
8559
8560       require strong key (G)
8561
8562           This option controls whether winbindd requires support for md5
8563           strong key support for the netlogon secure channel.
8564
8565           The following flags will be required NETLOGON_NEG_STRONG_KEYS,
8566           NETLOGON_NEG_ARCFOUR and NETLOGON_NEG_AUTHENTICATED_RPC.
8567
8568           You can set this to no if some domain controllers only support des.
8569           This might allows weak crypto to be negotiated, may via downgrade
8570           attacks.
8571
8572           The behavior can be controlled per netbios domain by using ´require
8573           strong key:NETBIOSDOMAIN = no´ as option.
8574
8575           Note for active directory domain this option is hardcoded to ´yes´
8576
8577           This option yields precedence to the reject md5 servers option.
8578
8579           This option takes precedence to the client schannel option.
8580
8581           Default: require strong key = yes
8582
8583       template homedir (G)
8584
8585           When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the
8586           winbindd(8) daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home
8587           directory for that user. If the string %D is present it is
8588           substituted with the user´s Windows NT domain name. If the string
8589           %U is present it is substituted with the user´s Windows NT user
8590           name.
8591
8592           Default: template homedir = /home/%D/%U
8593
8594       template shell (G)
8595
8596           When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the
8597           winbindd(8) daemon uses this parameter to fill in the login shell
8598           for that user.
8599
8600           Default: template shell = /bin/false
8601
8602       winbind cache time (G)
8603
8604           This parameter specifies the number of seconds the winbindd(8)
8605           daemon will cache user and group information before querying a
8606           Windows NT server again.
8607
8608           This does not apply to authentication requests, these are always
8609           evaluated in real time unless the winbind offline logon option has
8610           been enabled.
8611
8612           Default: winbind cache time = 300
8613
8614       winbindd privileged socket directory (G)
8615
8616           This setting controls the location of the winbind daemon´s
8617           privileged socket.
8618
8619           Default: winbindd privileged socket directory =
8620           /var/lib/samba/winbindd_privileged
8621
8622       winbindd socket directory (G)
8623
8624           This setting controls the location of the winbind daemon´s socket.
8625
8626           Except within automated test scripts, this should not be altered,
8627           as the client tools (nss_winbind etc) do not honour this parameter.
8628           Client tools must then be advised of the altered path with the
8629           WINBINDD_SOCKET_DIR environment varaible.
8630
8631           Default: winbindd socket directory = /var/run/samba/winbindd
8632
8633       winbind enum groups (G)
8634
8635           On large installations using winbindd(8) it may be necessary to
8636           suppress the enumeration of groups through the setgrent(),
8637           getgrent() and endgrent() group of system calls. If the winbind
8638           enum groups parameter is no, calls to the getgrent() system call
8639           will not return any data.
8640
8641               Warning
8642               Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave
8643               oddly.
8644           Default: winbind enum groups = no
8645
8646       winbind enum users (G)
8647
8648           On large installations using winbindd(8) it may be necessary to
8649           suppress the enumeration of users through the setpwent(),
8650           getpwent() and endpwent() group of system calls. If the winbind
8651           enum users parameter is no, calls to the getpwent system call will
8652           not return any data.
8653
8654               Warning
8655               Turning off user enumeration may cause some programs to behave
8656               oddly. For example, the finger program relies on having access
8657               to the full user list when searching for matching usernames.
8658           Default: winbind enum users = no
8659
8660       winbind expand groups (G)
8661
8662           This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd will traverse
8663           when flattening nested group memberships of Windows domain groups.
8664           This is different from the winbind nested groups option which
8665           implements the Windows NT4 model of local group nesting. The
8666           "winbind expand groups" parameter specifically applies to the
8667           membership of domain groups.
8668
8669           Be aware that a high value for this parameter can result in system
8670           slowdown as the main parent winbindd daemon must perform the group
8671           unrolling and will be unable to answer incoming NSS or
8672           authentication requests during this time.
8673
8674           The default value was changed from 1 to 0 with Samba 4.2. Some
8675           broken applications calculate the group memberships of users by
8676           traversing groups, such applications will require "winbind expand
8677           groups = 1". But the new default makes winbindd more reliable as it
8678           doesn´t require SAMR access to domain controllers of trusted
8679           domains.
8680
8681           Default: winbind expand groups = 0
8682
8683       winbind max clients (G)
8684
8685           This parameter specifies the maximum number of clients the
8686           winbindd(8) daemon can connect with.
8687
8688           Default: winbind max clients = 200
8689
8690       winbind max domain connections (G)
8691
8692           This parameter specifies the maximum number of simultaneous
8693           connections that the winbindd(8) daemon should open to the domain
8694           controller of one domain. Setting this parameter to a value greater
8695           than 1 can improve scalability with many simultaneous winbind
8696           requests, some of which might be slow.
8697
8698           Note that if winbind offline logon is set to Yes, then only one DC
8699           connection is allowed per domain, regardless of this setting.
8700
8701           Default: winbind max domain connections = 1
8702
8703           Example: winbind max domain connections = 10
8704
8705       winbind nested groups (G)
8706
8707           If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested
8708           groups. Nested groups are also called local groups or aliases. They
8709           work like their counterparts in Windows: Nested groups are defined
8710           locally on any machine (they are shared between DC´s through their
8711           SAM) and can contain users and global groups from any trusted SAM.
8712           To be able to use nested groups, you need to run nss_winbind.
8713
8714           Default: winbind nested groups = yes
8715
8716       winbind normalize names (G)
8717
8718           This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace whitespace in
8719           user and group names with an underscore (_) character. For example,
8720           whether the name "Space Kadet" should be replaced with the string
8721           "space_kadet". Frequently Unix shell scripts will have difficulty
8722           with usernames contains whitespace due to the default field
8723           separator in the shell. If your domain possesses names containing
8724           the underscore character, this option may cause problems unless the
8725           name aliasing feature is supported by your nss_info plugin.
8726
8727           This feature also enables the name aliasing API which can be used
8728           to make domain user and group names to a non-qualified version.
8729           Please refer to the manpage for the configured idmap and nss_info
8730           plugin for the specifics on how to configure name aliasing for a
8731           specific configuration. Name aliasing takes precedence (and is
8732           mutually exclusive) over the whitespace replacement mechanism
8733           discussed previously.
8734
8735           Default: winbind normalize names = no
8736
8737           Example: winbind normalize names = yes
8738
8739       winbind nss info (G)
8740
8741           This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name
8742           Service Information to construct a user´s home directory and login
8743           shell. Currently the following settings are available:
8744
8745           ·   template - The default, using the parameters of template shell
8746               and template homedir)
8747
8748           ·   <sfu | sfu20 | rfc2307 > - When Samba is running in security =
8749               ads and your Active Directory Domain Controller does support
8750               the Microsoft "Services for Unix" (SFU) LDAP schema, winbind
8751               can retrieve the login shell and the home directory attributes
8752               directly from your Directory Server. For SFU 3.0 or 3.5 simply
8753               choose "sfu", if you use SFU 2.0 please choose "sfu20". Note
8754               that retrieving UID and GID from your ADS-Server requires to
8755               use idmap config DOMAIN:backend = ad as well. The primary group
8756               membership is currently always calculated via the
8757               "primaryGroupID" LDAP attribute.
8758
8759
8760       Default: winbind nss info = template
8761
8762       Example: winbind nss info = sfu
8763
8764       winbind offline logon (G)
8765
8766           This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should allow
8767           to login with the pam_winbind module using Cached Credentials. If
8768           enabled, winbindd will store user credentials from successful
8769           logins encrypted in a local cache.
8770
8771           Default: winbind offline logon = no
8772
8773           Example: winbind offline logon = yes
8774
8775       winbind reconnect delay (G)
8776
8777           This parameter specifies the number of seconds the winbindd(8)
8778           daemon will wait between attempts to contact a Domain controller
8779           for a domain that is determined to be down or not contactable.
8780
8781           Default: winbind reconnect delay = 30
8782
8783       winbind refresh tickets (G)
8784
8785           This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should
8786           refresh Kerberos Tickets retrieved using the pam_winbind module.
8787
8788           Default: winbind refresh tickets = no
8789
8790           Example: winbind refresh tickets = yes
8791
8792       winbind request timeout (G)
8793
8794           This parameter specifies the number of seconds the winbindd(8)
8795           daemon will wait before disconnecting either a client connection
8796           with no outstanding requests (idle) or a client connection with a
8797           request that has remained outstanding (hung) for longer than this
8798           number of seconds.
8799
8800           Default: winbind request timeout = 60
8801
8802       winbind rpc only (G)
8803
8804           Setting this parameter to yes forces winbindd to use RPC instead of
8805           LDAP to retrieve information from Domain Controllers.
8806
8807           Default: winbind rpc only = no
8808
8809       winbind sealed pipes (G)
8810
8811           This option controls whether any requests from winbindd to domain
8812           controllers pipe will be sealed. Disabling sealing can be useful
8813           for debugging purposes.
8814
8815           The behavior can be controlled per netbios domain by using ´winbind
8816           sealed pipes:NETBIOSDOMAIN = no´ as option.
8817
8818           Default: winbind sealed pipes = yes
8819
8820       winbind separator (G)
8821
8822           This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when
8823           listing a username of the form of DOMAIN \user. This parameter is
8824           only applicable when using the pam_winbind.so and nss_winbind.so
8825           modules for UNIX services.
8826
8827           Please note that setting this parameter to + causes problems with
8828           group membership at least on glibc systems, as the character + is
8829           used as a special character for NIS in /etc/group.
8830
8831           Default: winbind separator = \
8832
8833           Example: winbind separator = +
8834
8835       winbind trusted domains only (G)
8836
8837           This parameter is designed to allow Samba servers that are members
8838           of a Samba controlled domain to use UNIX accounts distributed via
8839           NIS, rsync, or LDAP as the uid´s for winbindd users in the hosts
8840           primary domain. Therefore, the user DOMAIN\user1 would be mapped to
8841           the account user1 in /etc/passwd instead of allocating a new uid
8842           for him or her.
8843
8844           This parameter is now deprecated in favor of the newer idmap_nss
8845           backend. Refer to the idmap_nss(8) man page for more information.
8846
8847           Default: winbind trusted domains only = no
8848
8849       winbind use default domain (G)
8850
8851           This parameter specifies whether the winbindd(8) daemon should
8852           operate on users without domain component in their username. Users
8853           without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd
8854           server´s own domain. While this does not benefit Windows users, it
8855           makes SSH, FTP and e-mail function in a way much closer to the way
8856           they would in a native unix system.
8857
8858           This option should be avoided if possible. It can cause confusion
8859           about responsibilities for a user or group. In many situations it
8860           is not clear whether winbind or /etc/passwd should be seen as
8861           authoritative for a user, likewise for groups.
8862
8863           Default: winbind use default domain = no
8864
8865           Example: winbind use default domain = yes
8866
8867       dns proxy (G)
8868
8869           Specifies that nmbd(8) when acting as a WINS server and finding
8870           that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the
8871           NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the
8872           DNS server for that name on behalf of the name-querying client.
8873
8874           Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 characters,
8875           so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be 15 characters,
8876           maximum.
8877
8878           nmbd spawns a second copy of itself to do the DNS name lookup
8879           requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking action.
8880
8881           Default: dns proxy = yes
8882
8883       wins hook (G)
8884
8885           When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an
8886           external program for all changes to the WINS database. The primary
8887           use for this option is to allow the dynamic update of external name
8888           resolution databases such as dynamic DNS.
8889
8890           The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script or
8891           executable that will be called as follows:
8892
8893           wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list
8894
8895           ·   The first argument is the operation and is one of "add",
8896               "delete", or "refresh". In most cases the operation can be
8897               ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient
8898               information. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when
8899               the name has not previously been added, in that case it should
8900               be treated as an add.
8901
8902           ·   The second argument is the NetBIOS name. If the name is not a
8903               legal name then the wins hook is not called. Legal names
8904               contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores and periods.
8905
8906           ·   The third argument is the NetBIOS name type as a 2 digit
8907               hexadecimal number.
8908
8909           ·   The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) for the name in
8910               seconds.
8911
8912           ·   The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP addresses
8913               currently registered for that name. If this list is empty then
8914               the name should be deleted.
8915
8916       An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update program
8917       nsupdate is provided in the examples directory of the Samba source
8918       code.
8919
8920       No default
8921
8922       wins proxy (G)
8923
8924           This is a boolean that controls if nmbd(8) will respond to
8925           broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to
8926           set this to yes for some older clients.
8927
8928           Default: wins proxy = no
8929
8930       wins server (G)
8931
8932           This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP address for
8933           preference) of the WINS server that nmbd(8) should register with.
8934           If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this
8935           to the WINS server´s IP.
8936
8937           You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
8938           multi-subnetted network.
8939
8940           If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can give every wins
8941           server a ´tag´. For each tag, only one (working) server will be
8942           queried for a name. The tag should be separated from the ip address
8943           by a colon.
8944
8945               Note
8946               You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you have
8947               multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet browsing to work
8948               correctly.
8949           See the chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO on Network Browsing.
8950
8951           Default: wins server =
8952
8953           Example: wins server = mary:192.9.200.1 fred:192.168.3.199
8954           mary:192.168.2.61 # For this example when querying a certain name,
8955           192.19.200.1 will be asked first and if that doesn´t respond
8956           192.168.2.61. If either of those doesn´t know the name
8957           192.168.3.199 will be queried.
8958
8959           Example: wins server = 192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61
8960
8961       wins support (G)
8962
8963           This boolean controls if the nmbd(8) process in Samba will act as a
8964           WINS server. You should not set this to yes unless you have a
8965           multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular nmbd to be your
8966           WINS server. Note that you should NEVER set this to yes on more
8967           than one machine in your network.
8968
8969           Default: wins support = no
8970

WARNINGS

8972       Although the configuration file permits service names to contain
8973       spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will be ignored in
8974       comparisons anyway, so it shouldn´t be a problem - but be aware of the
8975       possibility.
8976
8977       On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - limit
8978       service names to eight characters.  smbd(8) has no such limitation, but
8979       attempts to connect from such clients will fail if they truncate the
8980       service names. For this reason you should probably keep your service
8981       names down to eight characters in length.
8982
8983       Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life for an
8984       administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes
8985       can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these sections. In
8986       particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are
8987       correct.
8988

VERSION

8990       This man page is correct for version 4 of the Samba suite.
8991

SEE ALSO

8993       samba(7), smbpasswd(8), smbd(8), nmbd(8), winbindd(8), samba(8), samba-
8994       tool(8), smbclient(1), nmblookup(1), testparm(1).
8995

AUTHOR

8997       The original Samba software and related utilities were created by
8998       Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open
8999       Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
9000
9001       The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page
9002       sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open
9003       Source software, available at ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and
9004       updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to
9005       DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to
9006       DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
9007
9008
9009
9010Samba 4.2                         06/19/2018                       SMB.CONF(5)
Impressum